2004 GMC Canyon

2004 GMC Canyon
2004 GMC Canyon Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-9
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-11
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-31
Air Bag Systems
...................................... 1-60
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-73
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-2
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-7
Windows ................................................. 2-12
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-14
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-16
Mirrors .................................................... 2-36
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-41
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-42
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-2
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-18
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-22
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-37
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-42
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
........ 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-47
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-47
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-48
Front Axle
............................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-55
Tires
...................................................... 5-57
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-94
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-103
Electrical System
.................................... 5-103
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-108
Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-10
Index .................................................................1
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French language copy of this manual
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC, and
the GMC Emblem are registered trademarks and the
name CANYON is a trademark of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it appears in this
manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. X2440 A First Edition
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If you do
this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you will find that pictures
and words work together to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what
is in the manual, and the page number where you will
find it.
© Copyright General Motors Corporation 10/06/03
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book.
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you
about things that could hurt you if you were to ignore
the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Don’t,”
“Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly. But the
notice will tell you what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols you may find on your vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Manual Lumbar ..............................................1-5
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Seatback Latches ...........................................1-8
Rear Seats .......................................................1-9
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) ......................1-9
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) ...............1-10
Safety Belts ...................................................1-11
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-11
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-15
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-16
Driver Position ..............................................1-16
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-23
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-24
Center Front Passenger Position .....................1-24
Rear Seat Passengers ..................................1-26
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ..........................1-28
Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................1-30
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-30
Child Restraints .............................................1-31
Older Children ..............................................1-31
Infants and Young Children ............................1-34
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-37
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-40
Top Strap ....................................................1-42
Top Strap Anchor Location .............................1-44
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ...........................1-46
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System (Models with an
Air Bag Off Switch) ....................................1-48
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System (Models without an
Air Bag Off Switch) ....................................1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ............................................1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position (Models with an
Air Bag Off Switch) ....................................1-54
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position (Models without an Air Bag
Off Switch) ...............................................1-58
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-60
Where Are the Air Bags? ...............................1-63
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ....................1-66
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .....................1-67
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .....................1-67
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? .......................................1-68
Air Bag Off Switch ........................................1-70
1-2
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-72
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ...........................1-73
Restraint System Check ..................................1-73
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-74
Front Seats
Manual Seats
This section tells you about the seats – how to adjust
them, and fold them up and down.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Move the lever located under the front of a manual seat
up to unlock it. Slide the seat to where you want it
and release the lever. Try to move the seat with your
body to make sure the seat is locked into place.
1-3
Power Seats
If your vehicle has this feature, there will be a control on
the outboard side of the front seat(s).
Horizontal Control: Raise or lower the front of the seat
by raising or lowering the forward edge of the control.
Raise or lower the rear of the seat by raising or lowering
the rear edge of the control.
Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the whole
control toward the front or the rear of the vehicle.
Moving the whole control up or down raises or lowers
the whole seat.
Vertical Control: This control reclines the seatbacks.
See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6 for more
information.
1-4
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, there will be a
knob located on the
outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
Turn the knob counterclockwise to increase lumbar
support and clockwise to decrease lumbar support.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the outboard
side of the front seats.
This feature will quickly heat the lower cushion and
lower back of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats
for added comfort.
Press the lower part of the switch to turn the heater on
at low heat. Press the upper part of the switch to
turn the heater on at high heat. Put the switch in the
center position to turn the heater off.
The ignition must be on for the heated seat feature to
work. The passenger’s safety belt must be engaged for
the heated seat feature to work on the passenger’s seat.
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have reclining seatbacks.
To manually recline your seatback, lift the lever on the
outboard side of the seat.
Release the lever to lock the seatback where you want
it. Pull up on the lever and without pushing on the
seatback, the seat will go to an upright position.
If you have power seats, you can use the vertical power
seat control to recline the seatback. Move the reclining
front seatback forward or rearward by moving the control
toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
1-6
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is
moving.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
If your vehicle is equipped with adjustable head
restraints, adjust your head restraint so that the top of
the restraint is closest to the top of your head. This
position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Push up on the head restraint to raise it. To lower
the head restraint, press the button located on top of
the seatback and push down on the head restraint.
1-7
Seatback Latches
Your vehicle may be equipped with front seatbacks that
fold forward to let people get into the rear seat or to
access the storage area behind the seat.
To fold the front seatback
forward, push the lever on
the side of the seat
rearward and pull the
seatback forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
To return the seatback to the upright position, push the
seatback all the way back until the latch catches. If the
seatback was reclined before being folded forward, it will
return to the reclined position.
1-8
Rear Seats
4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to fold down the other
seatback.
Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab)
If your vehicle is a crew cab, the rear seatback can be
folded forward. Before you can fold the rear seatback,
you need to unlatch the center safety belt buckle.
Use the following steps to lower one or both of the rear
seatbacks:
1. Insert a tool with a small tip into the slot to unlatch
the center position safety belt buckle. Then move
the belt to the side so it is not in the way.
2. Grasp the loop located
on the side of the
seatback you want to
fold and pull until
you hear a click.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
3. Fold the seatback down.
1-9
To return the seatback to the upright position, do the
following:
1. Lift the seatback up and push it back into place.
2. Reconnect the center safety belt latch plate to
the buckle.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked into place by
pushing and pulling on it.
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab)
If your vehicle has an
extended cab, there may
be a forward folding seat
in the rear area.
4. Repeat Steps 1 and 3 for the other seatback.
When the seatback is not in use, it should be kept in
the upright, locked position.
To fold the rear seat down, pull down on the bottom of the
seat until the seat is in place. To store the seat, push the
entire seat up until it is flush with the trim panel.
The rear seat storage compartments must be in the
rearward position before folding the seat down.
1-10
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow
people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a safety belt properly.
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-24.
1-11
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat
on wheels.
1-12
Put someone on it.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
doesn’t stop.
1-13
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-14
or the instrument panel...
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be – whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And your chance
of being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If my vehicle has air bags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts – not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that has
air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-15
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident – even one that isn’t your fault – you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules for
smaller children and babies. If a child will be riding in your
vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-31 or Infants and
Young Children on page 1-34. Follow those rules for
everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Safety belts are for everyone.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-16
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
1-17
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt height
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is
centered on your shoulder. The belt should be away from
your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-18
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons together and move
the height adjuster to the
desired position. After you
move the adjuster to where
you want it, try to move it
down without squeezing
the release buttons to
make sure it has locked
into position.
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-19
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not at the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-21
Q: What’s wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-22
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women.
Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously
injured if they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother.
When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more likely
that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For pregnant
women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts
effective is wearing them properly.
1-23
Right Front Passenger Position
Center Front Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-16.
Lap Belt
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt – except for one thing.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, you will engage the child restraint locking feature.
If this happens, just let the belt go back all the way
and start again.
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split front seat, someone can
sit in the center position.
When you sit in the center front seating position, you
have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
1-24
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the lap
part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-25
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts.
Here is how to wear one properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.
1-26
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-30.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
The safety belt also locks if you pull the belt very
quickly out of the retractor.
1-27
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear safety belt comfort guides
for the rear outside positions.
Rear safety belt comfort guides provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When attached to a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the
belt away from the neck and head.
Here is how to attach the comfort guide to the
shoulder belt.
1. Slide the guide off of its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-28
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt and insert the two edges of the belt
into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
1-29
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe crash in
which the front of the vehicle hits something.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
Restraint System Parts After a Crash on page 1-74.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-26.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide back on its storage clip located
between the interior body and the seatback.
1-30
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your
vehicle that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it,
and use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear
it, just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in a rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have a choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt to get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide.
1-31
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A:
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-32
If the child is sitting in a rear outside seat position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-28. If the child is
sitting in the center rear seat of a crew cab, move
the child toward the safety belt buckle. In either
case be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint that belts
provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-33
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby
will become so heavy it is not possible to
CAUTION:
1-34
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240-lb. (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.
1-35
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-36
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-37
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-38
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help reduce
the chance of injury, the child also has to be secured
within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt system secures
the add-on child restraint in the vehicle, and the
add-on child restraint’s harness system holds the
child in place within the restraint.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and
some high-back booster seats have a five-point harness.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out the
window.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
come down over each of the infant’s shoulders and
buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and a
crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hip
straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that swings up or to the side.
1-39
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
rear seat including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a child in a
rear-facing child restraint in the right front passenger seat
unless your vehicle has an air bag off switch and the air
bag off light shows off. Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger seat unless the
air bag is off. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag. Be sure to turn off the air bag before
using a rear-facing child restraint in the right
front seat position.
CAUTION:
1-40
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move the right front
passenger seat as far back as it will go. It is
better to secure the child restraint in a rear seat.
If you need to secure a rear-facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s position, the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag must be off. See Securing
a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch) and Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch) in the Index,
and Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-70 for more on this
including important safety information.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any
child restraint in your vehicle – even when no child
is in it.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
1-41
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether”.
It can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored
to the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, don’t use the restraint unless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
1-42
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed. If you have an
adjustable head restraint, route the top strap over it.
When using a top strap-equipped child restraint in a rear
outboard seating position of a crew cab model, route
the top strap over the top of the seatback. Then, attach
it to the anchor point for that seating position.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
1-43
Top Strap Anchor Location
Extended cab anchors shown
A. Top strap routing loops
B. Top strap anchors
C. LATCH anchors. See Lower Anchorages and
Top Tethers for Children (LATCH System) on
page 1-46.
1-44
Anchor points for the top strap in a regular or extended
cab vehicle are located behind the front seat on the
back wall of the passenger compartment. You must
route the top strap through the loop (A) at the top of
the seatback to attach the strap to the anchor (B)
as shown.
Follow these steps to access the anchors and attach the
top strap to an anchor:
1. Release the rear seatback from its latches (B).
See Rear Seat Operation (Crew Cab) on page 1-9 or
Rear Seat Operation (Extended Cab) on page 1-10
for instructions.
2. Attach the top strap to the anchor (A).
3. Push rearward on the seatback until it locks into its
upright position.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
secured properly.
Crew Cab
The anchor points for the top strap on Crew Cab vehicles
are located on the back wall behind the rear seat. You must
pull the seatback forward to access the anchors.
1-45
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle may be equipped with the LATCH System.
If it is you will find anchors (A) in the second row
outboard seating positions (crew cab and extended cab)
and in the front passenger position (regular cab and
extended cab without rear seats).
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors (A, B) and child
restraint attachments to secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle anchor to secure a
top tether strap (C).
1-46
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the anchors for this child
restraint system, place your hand in a palm-up position
and reach up between the seat cushion and the
seatback.
1-47
Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch)
Regular Cab Models and Extended
Cab Models without Rear Seats
Your vehicle has air bags. Regular cab models and
extended cab models without rear seats have an air bag
off switch on the instrument panel you can use to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag. See Air Bag
Off Switch on page 1-70 for more on this including
important safety information.
Unless the right front passenger’s frontal air bag has
been turned off, never put a rear-facing child restraint in
this vehicle. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the air bag has been
turned off.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
1-48
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group sit
in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-70.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air
bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-70. If your
child restraint is forward-facing, always move the
seat as far back as it will go before securing it in this
seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power Seats
on page 1-4. Never use a rear-facing child restraint in
this seat unless the air bag is off.
2. Find the LATCH anchorages in the passenger seat.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
3. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1-49
5. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage if
your vehicle has one. The child restraint instructions
will show you how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-42.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH anchorages.
Turn on the right front passenger’s frontal air bag when
you remove the child restraint from the vehicle unless
the person who will be sitting there is a member of
a passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off Switch
on page 1-70.
1-50
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-70 for more on this,
including important safety information.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed
for the LATCH System (Models
without an Air Bag Off Switch)
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models with Rear Seats
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
See Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
how. Also see Top Strap on page 1-42.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-51
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-52
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock (crew cab only).
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in
the Right Front Seat Position
(Models with an Air Bag Off Switch)
Regular Cab Models and Extended
Cab Models without Rear Seats
Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal air
bag. Regular cab models and extended cab models
without rear seats have a switch on the instrument panel
that you can use to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-70 for
more on this, including important safety information.
Unless the right front passenger’s frontal air bag has
been turned off, never put a rear facing child restraint in
the right front passenger’s seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag inflates. This is
because the back of the rear-facing child
restraint would be very close to the inflating
air bag. Do not use a rear-facing child restraint
in this vehicle unless the air bag has been
turned off.
Even though the air bag off switch is designed
to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag, no system is fail-safe, and no one can
guarantee that an air bag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be transported in vehicles with
a rear seat that will accommodate a rear-facing
child restraint, whenever possible.
1-54
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in your vehicle) until you have your
vehicle serviced. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-70.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. See Air Bag Off Switch on page 1-70.
If your child restraint is forward-facing, always move
the seat as far back as it will go before securing
it in this seat. See Manual Seats on page 1-3
or Power Seats on page 1-4.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-55
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-56
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
If you were using a rear-facing child restraint, turn on
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag when you
remove the rear-facing child restraint from the vehicle
unless the person who will be sitting there is a member
of a passenger air bag risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-70.
{CAUTION:
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag unless the person
sitting there is in a risk group. See Air Bag Off
Switch on page 1-70 for more on this,
including important safety information.
1-57
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position (Models
without an Air Bag Off Switch)
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models with Rear Seats
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-46. See Top Strap
on page 1-42 if the child restraint has one.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger air bag.
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front
passenger’s seat. Here is why:
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat position, see Where
to Put the Restraint on page 1-40.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal air bag, always move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing a forward-facing child
restraint. See Manual Seats on page 1-3 or Power
Seats on page 1-4.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-58
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-59
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the air bag systems.
Your vehicle has air bags – one air bag for the driver and
another air bag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have roof-mounted side impact air bags; one for
the driver and the passenger directly behind the driver
and one for the right front passenger and the person
seated directly behind that passenger.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-60
Air bags are designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating air bag. But these air bags
must inflate very quickly to do their job and comply
with federal regulations.
Here are the most important things to know about the
air bag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt – even if
you have air bags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Air bags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All air bags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Frontal air bags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to work only in
moderate to severe crashes where the front
of your vehicle hits something. They are not
designed to inflate in rollover, rear or low-speed
frontal crashes, or in many side crashes. And,
for some unrestrained occupants, frontal air
bags may provide less protection in frontal
crashes than more forceful air bags have
provided in the past. The roof-mounted side
impact air bags are designed to inflate only in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes. Everyone in your vehicle should
wear a safety belt properly — whether or not
there is an air bag for that person.
1-61
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you’re too close to an inflating air bag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for air bag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal air bags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
see the part of this manual called “Older
Children” or “Infants and Young Children.”
1-62
There is a air bag
readiness light on the
instrument panel which
shows the air bag symbol.
Where Are the Air Bags?
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-25
for more information.
The driver’s air bag is in the middle of the steering
wheel.
1-63
The right front passenger’s air bag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
1-64
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact air bag
for the driver and the person seated directly behind
the driver, it is located in the ceiling above the side
windows.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impact air bag
for the right front passenger and the person seated
directly behind that passenger, it is located in the ceiling
above the side windows.
If something is between an occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering. If your vehicle has side impact
air bags, never secure anything to the roof of
your vehicle by routing the rope or tiedown
through any door or window opening. If you
do, the path of an inflating side impact air bag
will be blocked. The path of an inflating air bag
must be kept clear.
1-65
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passengers frontal air bags
are designed to deploy only in moderate to severe
frontal, or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to
inflate only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according to
crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
(19.3 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 20 to 24 mph (32.2 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or deform,
such as a parked car, the threshold level will be higher.
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear impacts,
or in many side impacts because inflation would not help
the occupant.
1-66
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level”. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
Your vehicle has seat position sensors which enable the
sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s
seat and the right front passenger’s seat. Seat position
sensors provide information that is used to determine
if the air bags should deploy at a reduced level or at
full deployment.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side impact
air bags, inflation is determined by the location and
severity of the impact.
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, air bag, and related hardware
are all part of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger. For vehicles with side impact
air bags, the air bag modules are located in the ceiling
of the vehicle, near the side windows.
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal air bags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those air bags. Air bags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal air bags, and only in moderate to severe
side collisions for the side impact air bags.
1-67
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly that
some people may not even realize the air bag inflated.
Some components of the air bag module — the steering
wheel hub for the driver’s air bag, the instrument panel
for the right front passenger’s bag or the ceiling of your
vehicle near the side windows — will be hot for a short
time. The parts of the bag that come into contact with you
may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There will be
some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the
deflated air bags. Air bag inflation does not prevent the
driver from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor
does it stop people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an air bag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors, turn the interior lamps on and flash the
hazard warning flashers when the air bag inflates
(if battery power is available). You can lock the doors
again by using the door lock. The interior lamps
and hazard warning flashers will deactivate after
approximately 15 minutes.
1-68
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
• Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you do not get them, the air
bag system will not be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal
impact. If your vehicle has side impact air bags,
it also has electronic side sensors. Your vehicle is
equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which records information about the air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system and when the system
commands air bag inflation. It records the status of
the driver’s safety belt usage in a crash in which
the air bag deploys or a crash in which the air bag
nearly deploys. The module also records speed,
engine rpm, brake and throttle data.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air
bag system will not work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s air bag, or the side
impact air bag covering on the ceiling near the side
windows, the bag may not work properly. You may
have to replace the air bag module in the steering
wheel, both the air bag module and the instrument
panel for the right front passenger’s air bag, or
side impact air bag module and ceiling covering
for the roof-mounted side impact air bag. Do not
open or break the air bag coverings.
1-69
Air Bag Off Switch
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models without Rear Seats
Infant. An infant (less than 1 year old)
must ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• my vehicle has a rear seat too small to
accommodate a rear-facing infant seat; or
• the infant has a medical condition which, according
to the infant’s physician, makes it necessary for the
infant to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Child age 1 to 12. A child age 1 to 12 must
ride in the front seat because:
• my vehicle has no rear seat;
• although children ages 1 to 12 ride in the rear
If your vehicle is a regular cab model or an extended
cab model without rear seats, it has a switch on
the instrument panel that you can use to turn off the
right front passenger’s frontal air bag.
This switch should only be turned to the off position if
the person in the right front passenger’s position is
a member of a passenger risk group identified by the
national government as follows:
1-70
seat(s) whenever possible, children ages 1 to
12 sometimes must ride in the front because no
space is available in the rear seat(s) of my vehicle;
or
• the child has a medical condition which, according
to the child’s physician, makes it necessary for the
child to ride in the front seat so that the driver
can constantly monitor the child’s condition.
Medical Condition. A passenger has a
medical condition which, according to his
or her physician:
• causes the passenger air bag to pose a special risk
for the passenger; and
To turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag,
insert your ignition key
into the switch, push
in, and move the switch to
the off position.
• makes the potential harm from the passenger air
bag in a crash greater than the potential harm
from turning off the air bag and allowing the
passenger, even if belted, to hit the dashboard or
windshield in a crash.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the air bag would not
be able to inflate and help protect the person
sitting there. Do not turn off the passenger’s
frontal air bag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group.
The air bag off light will come on to let you know that
the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is off. The right
front passenger’s frontal air bag will remain off until
you turn it back on again, and the air bag off light will
stay on to remind you that the air bag is off.
1-71
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group
sit in the right front passenger’s position
(for example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced.
To turn the right front
passenger’s frontal air bag
on again, insert your
ignition key into the switch,
push in, and move the
switch to the auto position.
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems.To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with
yellow tape or yellow connectors. They are
probably part of the air bag system. Be sure to
follow proper service procedures, and make
sure the person performing work for you is
qualified to do so.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-72
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front of
the vehicle that could keep the air bags from
working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end sheet metal or
height, they may keep the air bag system from
working properly. Also, the air bag system may not
work properly if you relocate any of the air bag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before
you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers
and addresses for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need new
parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-74
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an air bag inflates, you will need to replace air bag
system parts. See the part on the air bag system earlier
in this section.
If the frontal air bags inflate, you will also need to
replace the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety
belt retractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new
retractor assembly will be there to help protect you in
a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal air bags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your air bag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-25.
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-2
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-7
Door Locks ....................................................2-7
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................2-8
Rear Door Security Locks (Crew Cab) ...............2-9
Lockout Protection ..........................................2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................2-10
Rear Doors (Extended Cab) ...........................2-10
Tailgate .......................................................2-10
Windows ........................................................2-12
Manual Windows ..........................................2-12
Power Windows ............................................2-13
Sliding Rear Window .....................................2-14
Sun Visors ...................................................2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-14
Passlock® ....................................................2-16
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-16
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-16
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-17
Starting Your Engine .....................................2-18
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-20
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-21
Manual Transmission Operation ......................2-24
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) ............................2-32
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual Transmission) .......2-33
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-33
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-34
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......2-34
Mirrors ...........................................................2-36
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-36
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ..............2-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-37
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-39
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-40
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-40
OnStar® System .............................................2-41
Storage Areas ................................................2-42
Glove Box ...................................................2-42
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-42
Front Armrest Storage Area ...........................2-43
Assist Handles .............................................2-43
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-43
Bed Rails ....................................................2-43
2-1
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They could
operate the power windows or other controls or
even make the vehicle move. The children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children.
2-2
There is one double-sided
key for the ignition, driver’s
door lock, and tailgate.
The key code number tells your dealer or a qualified
locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep this number in
a safe place. If you lose your keys, you will be able
to have new ones made easily using this number.
Your dealer should also have this number.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle call the GM
Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 7-6.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer provides
the owner with a pair of identical keys and a key
code number.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar may be able to send a command to
unlock your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-41
for more information.
2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
With this system you can lock and unlock your doors
from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 30 feet (9 m) away
using the remote keyless entry transmitter supplied
with your vehicle.
UNLOCK: Press this
button to unlock the driver’s
door and turn on the
interior lights. The parking
lamps may also flash,
and the horn may chirp,
when this button is pressed.
LOCK: Press this button to lock all the doors.
The parking lamps may also flash and the horn may
chirp when this button is pressed. Press the button again
within three seconds and the horn may chirp.
You can program different feedback modes through the
Driver Information Center (DIC). To program the modes,
press and hold both the unlock and lock buttons for
three approximately three seconds and the DIC
will display the active mode. Then press and hold the
trip odometer reset stem for approximately 2 seconds
to select the modes. For more information see
DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-37.
L (Panic): Press this button to make the horn sound
and the headlamps and taillamps flash for up to
30 seconds. To turn them off again, do one of these
three things: wait for 30 seconds; press the panic button
again; or start the vehicle.
Press the unlock button again within three seconds
and all of the doors will unlock.
2-5
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
To replace the battery, do the following:
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2-6
1. Insert a thin coin, or similar object, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing.
Gently pry the transmitter apart.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a three-volt
CR2032 or equivalent battery.
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
To unlock the door from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle will not open it. You increase
the chance of being thrown out of the
vehicle in a crash if the doors are not
locked. So, wear safety belts properly and
lock the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
To lock a door from the inside, rotate the manual lever
on your door forward. To unlock a door from the
inside, rotate the lever on the door rearward.
You will see a colored area on the lever when the door
is unlocked.
2-7
Power Door Locks
If your vehicle has power
door locks, the switches
are located on the driver’s
and the front passenger’s
armrests.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
If your vehicle has power door locks and the remote
keyless entry system, it will be equipped with an
auto lock/unlock feature which enables you to program
your vehicle’s power door locks from the driver’s
seating position.
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission it will be
programmed to have all the doors lock automatically
when the shift lever is moved out of PARK (P). All the
doors will unlock when the shift lever is moved back
into PARK (P).
Remove the ignition key and press L (lock) to lock
all the doors at once. To unlock all the doors,
press U (Unlock).
On crew cab models, use the manual door lock lever on
each rear door to lock or unlock the doors from the
rear seating area.
2-8
If your vehicle has a manual transmission, it will be
programmed to have all the doors lock when the vehicle
speed is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h). The doors
will unlock when the key is removed from the ignition.
To personalize the automatic door locks, see “Automatic
Door Locks” under DIC Controls and Displays on
page 3-37.
Rear Door Security Locks
(Crew Cab)
If you have the crew cab model, your vehicle may be
equipped with rear door security locks. With this feature,
you can lock the rear doors so they cannot be opened
from the inside by passengers.
To use the security locks, do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. Using your ignition key, turn the lock clockwise on
the driver’s side rear door, and counterclockwise on
the passenger’s side rear door to engage the
rear door security lock.
3. Close the door.
The security lock lever is
located on the inside edge
of each rear door.
4. Repeat these steps on the opposite rear door.
If you want to open the rear door when the security lock is
on, unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
To return the rear doors to normal use, disengage the
locks by inserting the ignition key and turning the lock
counterclockwise for the driver’s side rear door, and
clockwise for the passenger’s side rear door.
Lockout Protection
If you have power door locks, this feature protects you
from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is
in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power door lock switch is pressed when a door is
open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will
lock and then the driver’s door will unlock.
2-9
Leaving Your Vehicle
Tailgate
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Rear Doors (Extended Cab)
If you have an extended cab, your vehicle has rear
doors for convenience in loading and unloading cargo.
To open a rear door, open the front door. Then, use
the handle located on the front edge of the rear
door panel to open it. You must close the rear door
before closing the front door.
You can open the tailgate by pulling up on the handle
while pulling the tailgate down.
When you put the tailgate back up, be sure it latches
securely.
You can lock the tailgate using your ignition key.
Turn the key counterclockwise to lock the tailgate.
Turn the key clockwise to unlock the tailgate.
2-10
Removing the Tailgate
To partially lower the tailgate do the following:
Follow these steps if you want to remove the tailgate:
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly.
1. Raise the tailgate
slightly.
Tailgate Partially Down
Tailgate Fully Down
2. Remove the retaining cables from both ends of the
tailgate by pulling upward on the clip. Then, push
forward so the larger part of the hole on the bracket
is over the bolt. Pull the end over the bolt.
3. With the tailgate halfway down, pull the tailgate
toward you at the passenger’s side and then
move the tailgate to the right to release the
passenger’s side.
2. Pull upward on each clip. Then, push forward so
the larger part of the hole on the bracket is over
the bolt. Pull the end over the bolt.
3. Slide the end fitting off the bottom bolt and onto
the top bolt.
If you would like to close the tailgate, the bracket cannot
be in the partially open position and must be anchored
on the bottom bolt, using the secondary position on
the end fitting.
Reverse the procedure to reinstall the tailgate. Make
sure it is secure.
2-11
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
On a vehicle with manual windows, use the handle on
each door to open and close each window.
2-12
Power Windows
Press the forward edge of the control down to lower
the window.
The power window
controls are located on
the armrest of each door.
Do not hold all four power window switches down for
several seconds after the windows have been completely
lowered or raised, because the vehicle may blow a fuse.
Express Down Windows
Crew cab switches shown
The driver’s door has switches for the passenger
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACC (Accessory) or ON
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See “Retained Accessory Power” under Ignition
Positions on page 2-17.
Pull up the forward edge of the control with the power
window symbol on it to raise the window.
The driver’s window also has an express down feature
that allows the windows to be lowered without holding
the switch. Press and hold the front edge of the window
switch for one second to activate the express down
mode. The express down mode can be canceled at any
time by pulling up on the switch. To open the window
partway, lightly tap the switch until the window is at the
desired position.
Window Lockout
If you have a crew cab vehicle with power windows,
you will also have a window lockout button located
above the window switches. This feature disables the
rear windows switches when the window lockout button
is pressed. To turn the lockout feature on or off,
press the window lockout button. When the feature is
off, the power windows will operate normally.
2-13
Sliding Rear Window
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
Content Theft-Deterrent
If your vehicle has the
remote keyless entry
system, the vehicle has
a content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
If your vehicle has this feature, squeeze the latch in the
center of the window and slide the glass to open it.
When you close the window, be sure the latch is engaged.
Sun Visors
To block glare, pull the visor down. It can also be
detached from the center mount and moved to the side
to block glare from that direction.
Visor Vanity Mirror
The passenger’s side sun visor has a mirror on it.
Pull down the visor to access the mirror.
2-14
To activate the content theft-deterrent system,
do the following:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light flashes.
If the vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, and OnStar®
locks the doors, with all the doors closed, it will activate
the system.
If the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, but a door is open, the horn will chirp six
times. Close the open door and the system will be
activated.
If a locked door is not opened with the remote keyless
entry transmitter, or OnStar®, the alarm will go off.
The front turn signal lamps will flash for two minutes,
and the horn will sound for two minutes, then will turn off
to save the battery power.
Remember, the theft-deterrent system won’t activate if
you lock the doors with a key, the manual door lock, or
power door lock switch. The system can only be activated
with the remote keyless entry transmitter, or OnStar®.
You should also remember that you can start your vehicle
with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off.
Here’s how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you don’t want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the door
key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with a the remote keyless
entry transmitter. Unlocking a door any other
way will set off the alarm.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
3. To turn the alarm off, press the unlock button on
the remote keyless entry transmitter or start the
engine.
If the alarm does not sound when it should but the lights
flash, check to see if the horn works. The horn fuse
may be blown. To replace the fuse, see Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-104.
If the alarm does not sound or the headlamps do not
flash, see your dealer for service.
If you set off the alarm by accident, you can turn off
the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The alarm won’t stop if you try
to unlock a door any other way.
2-15
Passlock®
®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, the fuel system is
disabled and the vehicle will not start.
During normal operation, the security light will turn off
approximately five seconds after the key is turned
to RUN. See Security Light on page 3-35.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
about 10 minutes until the light stops flashing before
trying to restart the engine. Remember to release
the key from START as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine does not start after three tries, the vehicle
needs service.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
may also want to check the fuse see Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-104. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
2-16
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less
for the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one speed — fast or
slow — for the first 500 miles (805 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-60 for more information.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition
switch, you can turn to four
different positions.
LOCK (A): This position locks your steering wheel,
ignition and transmission on automatic transmission
vehicles. If your vehicle has a manual transmission, this
position locks your steering wheel. It is a theft-deterrent
feature. You will only be able to remove your key
when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles, turning the
key to LOCK will lock the steering column and
result in a loss of ability to steer the vehicle.
This could cause a collision. If you need to
turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving,
turn the key only to ACC. Do not push the key
in while the vehicle is moving.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
ACC (ACCESSORY) (B): This is the position in which
you can operate your electrical accessories or items
plugged into the accessory power outlets. It also unlocks
the steering wheel and ignition. Use this position if
your vehicle must be pushed or towed.
2-17
ON (C): This is the position that the switch returns to
after you start your engine and release the switch.
The switch stays in ON when the engine is running.
But even when the engine is not running, you can use
ON to operate your electrical accessories and to display
some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator
lights.
START (D): This is the position that starts the engine.
When the engine starts, release the key. The ignition
switch will return to ON for normal driving.
When the engine is not running, ACC and ON allow you
to operate your electrical accessories, such as the
radio or items plugged into the accessory power outlets.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s
door when the ignition is in ACC or LOCK and the key
is in the ignition.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) which will allow certain features of your
vehicle to continue working for up to 20 minutes after the
ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio and power windows will work when the
ignition key is in ON or ACC. Once the key is turned
from ON to OFF, these features will continue to work
for up to 20 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-18
Starting Your Engine
Automatic Transmission
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is a
safety feature. To restart when you are already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL and the
parking brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety
feature.
Starting Your Engine
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while
you hold the ignition key in START. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and let up on the
accelerator pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try.
Depending on the outside temperature, the engine
starter may continue cranking the engine up to
approximately four seconds after you release the
ignition key. This is normal.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or 18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START and hold it there up to
15 seconds. When the engine starts, let go of
the key.
2. If your engine still will not start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
2-19
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
In very cold weather, 0°F (–18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located in the engine compartment
behind the underhood fuse block on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110–volt AC outlet.
2-20
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that you
contact your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for
that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Your automatic transmission has a shift lever on the
steering column.
It features an electronic shift position indicator within the
instrument cluster. This display must be powered
anytime the shift lever is capable of being moved out of
PARK (P). This means that if your key is in OFF, but
not locked, there will be a small current drain on
your battery which could discharge your battery over a
period of time. If you need to leave your key in the
ignition in OFF for an extended period, it is
recommended that you disconnect the battery cable
from the battery to prevent discharging your battery.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle will not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, always set your parking
brake and move the shift lever to PARK (P). See
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transmission)
on page 2-30. If you are pulling a trailer,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to
fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition key is in RUN.
2-21
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you want. See Shifting
Out of Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-32.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-44.
{CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is in
PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in NEUTRAL.
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
two-wheel high (2H) or four-wheel high (4H) or
four-wheel low (4L) — not in NEUTRAL.
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-30.
2-22
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. If you
need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power but
lower fuel economy than THIRD (3). You can use
SECOND (2) on hills. It can help control your speed as
you go down steep mountain roads, but then you
would also want to use your brakes off and on. You can
also use SECOND (2) for starting your vehicle from a
stop on slippery road surfaces.
DRIVE (D) should not be used when towing a trailer,
carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills, or for
off-road driving. Select THIRD (3) when operating the
vehicle under any of these conditions.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
but lower fuel economy than SECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the vehicle is moving
forward, the transmission will not shift into FIRST (1)
until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving.
However, it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D). You should use THIRD (3) when towing
a trailer, carrying a heavy load, driving on steep hills
or winding roads or for off-road driving.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. If you
are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a
hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
2-23
Manual Transmission Operation
Five-Speed
This is your shift pattern.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
THIRD, FOURTH AND FIFTH (3, 4 and 5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the
clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
Here is how to operate your manual transmission:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you slowly press down on the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Then press
the clutch pedal back down and shift into FIRST (1).
2-24
REVERSE (R): To back up, press the clutch pedal.
After the vehicle stops, shift into REVERSE (R).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal. If it is hard to shift, let the shift
lever return to NEUTRAL and release the clutch
pedal. Then press the clutch again and shift into
REVERSE (R). Do not attempt to shift into the fift
h gear position prior to shifting into REVERSE (R).
Your transmission has a lock out feature which prevents
a fifth gear to reverse gear shift.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go
on and off if you quickly change the position of
the accelerator. Ignore the shift light when you
downshift.
Use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and is equipped with
a manual transmission, disregard the shift light when
the transfer case is in 4LO.
Up-Shift Light
For more information, see Up-Shift Light
(Manual Transmission) on page 3-28.
This light will show you
when to shift to the next
higher gear for best
fuel economy.
Shift Speeds
{CAUTION:
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more
than one gear at a time when you downshift.
2-25
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send your
engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra
traction. To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel
drive, you must be familiar with its operation. Read
the part that follows before using four-wheel drive. You
should use two-wheel-drive high (2HI) for most
normal driving conditions.
Notice: Driving on pavement in four-wheel drive for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive
in four-wheel drive on pavement for extended
periods of time.
The transfer case buttons are located to the right of the
steering wheel on the instrument panel.
2-26
Use these buttons to shift into and out of four-wheel
drive. You can choose from the following:
2m(2HI): This setting is for driving in most street and
highway situations. Your front axle is not engaged
in two-wheel drive.
N (Neutral): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case to
NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to set
the parking brake before placing the transfer
case in NEUTRAL. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
4m(4HI): This setting engages your front axle to help
drive your vehicle. Use 4HI when you need extra
traction, such as on snowy or icy roads, or in most
off-road situations.
4n(4LO): This setting also engages your front axle to
give you extra traction. It sends the maximum power
to all four wheels. You might choose 4LO if you
were driving off-road in sand, mud or deep snow and
climbing or descending steep hills.
Indicator lights in the buttons show you which setting
you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle in
for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting.
It will remain illuminated when the shift is completed.
If for some reason the transfer case cannot make
a requested shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
Shifting from 2HI to 4HI
Press and release the 4HI button. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will lock automatically.
Shifting from 4HI to 2HI
Press and release the 2HI button. This can be done at
any speed, and the front axle will unlock automatically.
Shifting from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO
To shift from 2HI or 4HI to 4LO, the vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transmission or the clutch pedal
engaged in vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission. The preferred method for shifting into
4LO is to have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
Press and release the 4LO button. You must wait for
the 4LO indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear or
releasing the clutch pedal.
If the 4LO button is pressed when your vehicle is in
gear and/or moving, the 4LO indicator light will flash for
30 seconds and not complete the shift.
On automatic transmission equipped vehicles, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4LO, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4LO button. While the 4LO indicator light is flashing, shift
your transmission into PARK (P). Press 4LO again.
Wait until the 4LO indicator light remains illuminated
before shifting your transmission into gear. Press
the 4LO button again to complete the shift. This will get
you into 4LO, but you should take your vehicle in for
service to restore normal operation.
2-27
Shifting from 4LO to 2HI or 4HI
Shifting to NEUTRAL
To shift from 4LO to 2HI or 4HI, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 1.2 mph (2 km/h) with
the transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or the clutch pedal
engaged. The preferred method for shifting out of 4LO
is to have your vehicle moving 1.2 mph (2 km/h).
Press and release the 4HI button. You must wait for
the 4HI indicator light to stop flashing and remain
illuminated before shifting your transmission into gear
or releasing the clutch pedal.
Use NEUTRAL when you plan to tow your vehicle.
See Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-47
for towing instructions. To shift the transfer case into
NEUTRAL, set the parking brake, then press and hold
the 2HI and the 4LO buttons at the same time for
10 seconds.
If the 4HI button is pressed when your vehicle is in gear
and/or moving, the 4HI indicator light will flash for
30 seconds but not complete the shift.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, if your
transfer case does not shift into 4HI, your transmission
indicator switch may require adjustment. With your
transmission in NEUTRAL (N), press and release the
4HI button. While the 4HI indicator light is flashing, shift
your transmission into PARK (P). Wait until the 4HI
indicator light remains illuminated before shifting your
transmission into gear. Press the 4HI button again
to complete the shift. This will get you into 4HI, but you
should take your vehicle in for service to restore
normal operation.
2-28
Shifting out of NEUTRAL
After towing your vehicle, you will have to shift out of
NEUTRAL in order to drive. To shift out of NEUTRAL,
do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake
pedal. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more
information.
2. Start a vehicle with an automatic transmission in
PARK (P). Use FIRST (1) for vehicles with a
manual transmission.
3. Put an automatic transmission in NEUTRAL (N) or
press the clutch pedal for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
4. Press the button for the desired transfer case
position (2HI, 4HI or 4LO).
5. Shift the transmission to the desired gear. After the
transfer case has shifted out of NEUTRAL, the
indicator light will go out.
A re-engagement sound is normal when shifting out
of NEUTRAL.
Parking Brake
The parking brake pedal is
located to the left of the
regular brake pedal,
near the driver’s door.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least three
seconds. The chime will deactivate and the light will
turn off when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is
moving below 3 mph (5 km/h). See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-28.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
2-29
Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) position like this:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-60.
• Pull the lever toward you.
2-30
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
{CAUTION:
• Move the lever up as far as it will go.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-31
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
Park (P) (Automatic Transmission) on page 2-30.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
Shifting Out of Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK
(P) when the ignition is in the LOCK position. In addition,
you have to fully apply the regular brakes before you
can shift from PARK (P) when the ignition is in ON.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-21.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure
on the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, press the shift lever button and move the shift
lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still cannot
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACC (Accessory).
(There is no shift interlock in this key position.)
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-32
Parking Your Vehicle
(Manual Transmission)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Your vehicle has a manual transmission. Before you
get out of your vehicle, move the shift lever into
REVERSE (R), and firmly apply the parking brake.
Once the shift lever has been placed into REVERSE (R)
with the clutch pedal pressed in, you can turn the
ignition key to LOCK, remove the key and release
the clutch.
If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle is pulling a
trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
2-33
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you can not see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange or
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into your
vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-34
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if
you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
Engine Exhaust on page 2-34.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-40.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle will
be free to roll — even if your shift lever is
in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So be sure the transfer case is in a
drive gear — not in NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-26.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle
will not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)
(Automatic Transmission) on page 2-30.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-60.
2-35
Mirrors
Mirror Operation
Manual Rearview Mirror
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving.
Press the tab forward (away from you) for day driving.
Pull the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
You can adjust the mirror for day or night driving.
Press the tab forward (away from you) for day driving.
Pull the tab back (toward you) for night driving.
The mirror may have lamps. To manually turn the lamps
on or off, press the button next to each lamp.
Manual Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®
Your vehicle may have a manual rearview mirror with
the OnStar® System and map lamps.
There are also three OnStar® buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your dealer for more
information on the system and how to subscribe to
OnStar®. See OnStar® System on page 2-41 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
Map Lamps
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press the
button next to each lamp.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror housing.
2-36
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass and Temperature
Display
Your vehicle may have an automatic dimming rearview
mirror with a compass, temperature display, and
map lamps.
Mirror Operation
The mirror automatically changes to reduce glare from
headlamps behind you. A time delay feature prevents
rapid changing from the day to night positions while
driving under lights and through traffic.
P (On/Off):
The automatic dimming feature is
automatically activated when the vehicle is started.
The automatic dimming feature is turned on or off by
pressing this button located on the lower part of
the mirror. Press and hold the button for up to three
seconds to turn this feature on or off.
Compass Operation
The mirror has an eight-point compass display in
the upper right corner of the mirror face. When on,
the compass automatically calibrates as the vehicle is
driven.
When the ignition and the compass feature are on,
the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the current compass heading.
For example, NE is displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
If after two seconds the display does not show a
compass heading, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, note
pad holder or similar object. If the letter C appears in
the compass window, the compass needs calibration.
T (Indicator Light):
The mirror compass can be calibrated by driving
the vehicle in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the
display reads a direction.
Map Lamps
The compass can be placed in calibration mode by
pressing and holding the on/off button until a C appears
on the compass display.
This light will turn on when the
automatic dimming feature is active.
The mirror has map lamps located at the bottom of the
mirror. To manually turn the lamps on or off, press
the button next to each lamp.
2-37
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the mirror
is not adjusted for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the factory.
It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if you live outside
zone eight. Under certain circumstances, such as a long
distance, cross-country trip, it will be necessary to
adjust the compass variance.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the zone map that follows.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a zone
number appears on the display.
3. Once the zone number appears on the display,
press the on/off button quickly until you reach
the correct zone number. Stop pressing the button
and the mirror will return to normal operation.
If C appears in the compass window, the compass
may need calibration. See “Compass Calibration”
listed previously.
2-38
Temperature Display Operation
Outside Manual Mirrors
The outside air temperature is displayed in the window
located at the lower center of the mirror face.
Adjust these mirrors by hand so that you can just see
the side of your vehicle when you are sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Press and hold the far right button for four seconds and
release. This will change the temperature reading
between degrees Fahrenheit, degrees Celsius, or turn
the display off.
Cleaning the Mirror
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
The mirrors can be folded inward to prevent damage
when going through an automatic car wash. To fold,
push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the mirror
to its original position, push outward. Be sure to
return both mirrors to the unfolded position before
driving.
2-39
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls are
located on the driver’s door
armrest.
The mirrors can be manually folded inward to prevent
damage when going through an automatic car wash.
To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. To return the
mirror to its original position, push outward. Be sure
to return both mirrors to the unfolded position before
driving.
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s outside rearview mirror is convex.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more
from the driver’s seat.
To adjust the power mirrors, do the following:
1. Move the selector switch to the L (left) or R (right)
to choose the driver’s or passenger’s mirror.
2. Use the arrows located on the four-way control pad
to move the mirror in the direction you want the
mirror to go.
3. Return the selector switch to the center position
once the mirrors are adjusted.
If the mirror begins making a ratcheting sound, the
mirror has reached the end of its travel and can go no
farther in that direction. To stop the sound, reverse
the mirror direction using the control pad.
2-40
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® System
OnStar® Services
One of the following plans is normally included for a
specific duration with each vehicle equipped with
OnStar®. You can upgrade or extend your OnStar®
service plan to meet your needs.
Your vehicle may have this feature. OnStar® uses
global positioning system (GPS) satellite technology,
wireless communications, and state of the art call
centers to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information and convenience services.
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in your OnStar®-equipped
vehicle’s glove box literature. For more information, visit
www.onstar.com, contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the blue OnStar® button
to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day,
7 days a week.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of OnStar® services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for OnStar® Personal
Calling and OnStar® Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan services
• Route Support
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-41
Luxury and Leisure Plan
• All Directions and Connections Plan services
• Personal Concierge
®
OnStar Personal Calling
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, pull on the lever.
®
With OnStar Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. You can place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts and no additional roaming charges. To find out
more about OnStar® Personal Calling, refer to the
OnStar® owner’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
With OnStar® Virtual Advisor you can listen to your
favorite news, entertainment and information topics,
such as traffic and weather reports. You are able
to listen and reply to your e-mail through your vehicle’s
speakers.
2-42
Cupholder(s)
Front Cupholders
Your vehicle may have two cupholders located on the
lower part of the front doors as well as two cupholders
located at the front end of the console. Vehicles
with bench seats may have cupholders attached to the
front of the center seat.
Rear Cupholders
If your vehicle is an extended cab or crew cab model,
your vehicle also has two rear cupholders. On crew cab
models, the cupholders are located at the front end
of the rear center seat cushion. On extended cab
models, the rear seat cupholders are located on top of
the rear center console.
Front Armrest Storage Area
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a two-tiered center armrest
storage area. Lift up on the upper tab located at the front
of the armrest to release the latch. Lift the lid to the
top storage area. A second tab is located below the
top one and allows you to access the bottom storage
area. Lift up on the lower tab to release the latch.
Then, raise the lid of the lower storage area. The upper
storage area will lift up with the lid of the lower
storage area.
If your vehicle is an extended cab model, it may be
equipped with storage compartments under the
rear seats.
To close the storage area(s), lower the lid(s) until you
feel the latch close.
Assist Handles
Your vehicle may have assist handles to be used when
getting out of your vehicle. If your vehicle has assist
handles, they may be located above the front passenger
door if you have a regular cab, or above the front and
rear passenger doors if you have an extended cab
or crew cab.
Bed Rails
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has bed rails, they are there for
appearance only. If you try to tie down a load
with them, or to secure things in your truck,
not only can it damage the bed rails, but the
load can loosen. This could cause injury to
you or others. Secure loads by using the cargo
tie-down loops, inside the truck bed area.
If your vehicle is equipped with roof-mounted side
impact air bags, there will be assist handles located
above both the driver’s and front passenger’s doors.
2-43
✍ NOTES
2-44
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-2
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-4
Horn .............................................................3-4
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-5
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-5
Exterior Lamps .............................................3-12
Interior Lamps ..............................................3-15
Accessory Power Outlets ...............................3-16
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter ........................3-17
Climate Controls ............................................3-18
Climate Control System .................................3-18
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-21
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-22
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-23
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-24
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-24
Tachometer .................................................3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-24
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................3-25
Air Bag Off Light ..........................................3-26
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-27
Up-Shift Light (Manual Transmission) ...............3-28
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-28
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-30
Oil Pressure Light .........................................3-34
Security Light ...............................................3-35
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-35
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-35
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ...........3-36
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-36
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-37
DIC Controls and Displays .............................3-37
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-39
Audio System(s) .............................................3-42
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-43
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio Data
Systems (RDS) .........................................3-43
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-44
Radio with CD ..............................................3-47
Radio with Six-Disc CD .................................3-56
Theft-Deterrent Feature (Non-RDS Radios) .......3-67
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) .............3-67
Radio Reception ...........................................3-68
Care of Your CDs .........................................3-68
Care of Your CD Player ................................3-68
Fixed Mast Antenna ......................................3-68
Chime Level Adjustment ................................3-68
3-1
Instrument Panel Overview
Manual transmission shown, automatic transmission similar
3-2
The main components of your vehicle’s instrument
panel are the following:
A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-21.
B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
C. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-23.
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 3-4.
E. Passenger Side Air Bag. See Air Bag Systems
on page 1-60.
F. Park Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29.
G. Horn. See Horn on page 3-4.
H. Traction Control Button or Four-Wheel Drive Buttons.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9
and Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-42.
J. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtrays
and Cigarette Lighter on page 3-17.
K. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-18.
L. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlets on page 3-16.
M. Air Bag Off Switch (Regular cab and rear seat
delete only). See “Air Bag Off Switch” under
Air Bag Systems on page 1-60.
N. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 2-42.
3-3
Hazard Warning Flashers
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
on the instrument
panel, between the
two air vents in the center.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn symbol on the
steering wheel pad.
3-4
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. If you have the tilt steering wheel,
you can raise it to the highest level to allow more room
for the driver to enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
The tilt lever is located on the driver’s side of the
steering column, under the turn signal lever.
To tilt, hold the steering wheel and pull the tilt lever
toward you. Move the wheel to a comfortable level,
then release the tilt lever to lock the wheel in place.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Turn and Lane Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
Windshield Washer
Cruise Control
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
3-5
Turn and Lane Change Signals
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you
to signal a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
3-6
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may
be burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn
signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-104.
Turn Signal On Chime
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL will also
appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message off,
move the turn signal lever to the off position.
See “TURN SIGNAL” under DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-39 for more information.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Flash-to-Pass
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
3-7
Windshield Wipers
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn the
band to the second solid band past the delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they’re frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
worn or damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-8
Windshield Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
QL(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked
with the windshield washer symbol at the top of
the multifunction lever. To spray washer fluid on the
windshield, push the paddle. The wipers will clear the
window and then either stop or return to your preset
speed.
Cruise Control
Cruise control will not work if your parking brake is set,
or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low.
Your vehicle may be equipped with cruise control.
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can not drive safely at a steady speed. So,
do not use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Move the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system (if equipped) begins to limit wheel spin,
the cruise control will automatically disengage.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
When road conditions allow you to safely use it again,
you may turn cruise control back on.
3-9
Setting Cruise Control
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need to
reset it.
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
3-10
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator
pedal. You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to resume/
accelerate. Hold it there until you get up to the
speed you want, and then release the switch.
To increase your speed in very small amounts,
move the switch briefly to resume/accelerate.
Each time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press and hold the set button until you reach the
lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may want to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal
• Move the cruise control switch to off
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-11
Exterior Lamps
AUTO: Turn the knob to this position to automatically
turn on the headlamps at normal brightness, together
with the following:
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
Parking Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
See “Automatic Headlamp System” following, for more
information.
;(Parking Lamps):
Turn the knob to this position to
turn on the parking lamps, together with the following:
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the exterior lamps.
O(Exterior Lamps): Turn the knob, located to the
right of this symbol, to choose one of the four exterior
lamp positions.
9(Off): Turn the knob to this position to turn off all
exterior lamps including the DRLs.
3-12
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
2(Headlamps):
Turn the knob to this position to turn
on the headlamps, together with the previously listed
lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from low to high beam
by pushing the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel.
Automatic Headlamp System
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature.
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights may also
be dim.
Your vehicle may have a light sensor located on the top
of the instrument panel. Be sure it is not covered, or
the system will be on whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp system so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights
does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic
headlamp system will only be affected when the
light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting longer
than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take approximately several
seconds for the automatic headlamp system to change
to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay, your
instrument panel cluster may not be as bright as usual.
Make sure your instrument panel brightness control
is in the full bright position. See “Instrument Panel
Brightness” under Interior Lamps on page 3-15.
Lamps On Reminder
If a door is open, a reminder chime will sound when
your headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned
on and your key is out of the ignition. To turn off
the chime, turn the headlamp switch to off and then
back on. In the automatic mode, the headlamps turn off
once the ignition is in LOCK.
3-13
Daytime Running Lamps
Fog Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold
in Canada.
If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for
better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Your parking
lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for
your fog lamps to work.
The fog lamp button is
located near the exterior
lamps control.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
•
•
•
•
The ignition is on.
The exterior lamps control is in AUTO.
The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P).
The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarkers and other lamps will not
be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on while the
headlamps or parking lamps are on. Press the button
again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow in the
button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on the headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off,
the fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after you
restart the vehicle, you will need to press the fog lamp
button again.
3-14
Cargo Lamps
Interior Lamps
If your vehicle is equipped with cargo lamps, you can
use them if you need more light in the cargo area of your
vehicle. The dome lamps must be on before you can
turn on the cargo lamps.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Press this button to
turn the cargo lamps
on and off.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to
the exterior lamps control. See Exterior Lamps on
page 3-12.
D (Instrument Panel Lights): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down to brighten or dim the instrument panel
lights and the radio display. This will only work if
the headlamps or parking lamps are on.
To turn on the dome lamp, with the vehicle doors
closed, turn the thumbwheel all the way up.
3-15
Dome Lamp
Accessory Power Outlets
The dome lamp will come on when you open a door.
Your vehicle may have an accessory power outlet.
You can also turn the dome lamp on by turning the
thumbwheel all the way up. In this position, the dome
lamp will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
With accessory power outlets you can plug in auxiliary
electrical equipment such as a cellular telephone or
CB radio.
E (Dome Override):
Your vehicle may have two accessory power outlets
located on the lower part of the instrument panel below
the climate control system and there may be one
located on the rear of the center console. A small cap
must be pulled down to access an accessory power
outlet. When not using an outlet be sure to cover it with
the protective cap.
Press this button, located
below the exterior lamp control, to turn the dome lamp
off even when a door is opened. To return the lamp
to automatic operation, press the button again.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lamps will not
come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
Battery Run-Down Protection
This feature shuts off the dome lamp if it is left on for
more than 20 minutes when the ignition is in LOCK.
This will keep your battery from running down.
3-16
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
proper installation instructions included with the
equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
Your ashtray is located at the front of your center
console area.
Notice: If you put papers or other flammable items
in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To use the lighter, press it in all the way, and let go.
When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-17
Climate Controls
Temperature Knob
Climate Control System
The left knob on the control panel is used to adjust the
temperature of the air in the vehicle. Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease
the temperature.
Fan Knob
9 (Fan):
The center knob on the control panel is
used to control the fan speed. Turn the knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan
speed.
If the knob is set on “0” (zero), some outside air will still
enter the vehicle and will be directed according to
the position of the mode knob.
Uplevel climate controls shown, base similar
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
3-18
Mode Knob
Mode Buttons
The right knob on the control panel is used to direct the
airflow inside your vehicle. Turn the knob to select
one of the following modes:
@ (Recirculation):
H (Vent):
Select this mode to direct air to the
instrument panel outlets.
\(Bi-Level):
Select this mode to direct approximately
half of the air to the instrument panel outlets, and the
remaining air to the floor outlets and the defroster
and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
Select this mode to direct air to the floor
outlets. Recirculation does not work in this mode.
If your vehicle has air
conditioning, you will have the recirculation feature.
This mode recirculates air inside the cabin, and prevents
outside air from coming in the vehicle. It can be used
to prevent outside odors from entering your vehicle and
cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. Press this
button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
An indicator light on the button will come on to let you
know the recirculation mode is activated.
Recirculation is only available in the bi-level and vent
modes. If you push the recirculation button while
the system is in any other mode, the light on the button
will flash to indicate that recirculation is not available.
3-19
#(Air Conditioning):
Your vehicle may have air
conditioning. Press this button to turn the air-conditioning
system on or off. An indicator light on the button will
come on to let you know the air conditioning is activated.
When the system is on, this setting cools and
dehumidifies the air entering your vehicle.
The air conditioning will not function if the fan is
turned off.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass.
This can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield and side windows. Use the defog
mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm
the passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or
frost from the windshield more quickly. For best results,
clear all snow and ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Turn the mode knob on the climate control panel
clockwise to select the defog or defrost modes.
/(Floor/Defog):
This mode directs the air to the
windshield, the side window outlets, and to the
floor outlets. When you select this mode, the system
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is near freezing or below. Recirculation
is not available in this mode.
0 (Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, and the side window outlets. When you
select this mode, the system runs the air conditioning
compressor unless the outside temperature is near, or
below freezing. Recirculation is not available in this
mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-20
Outlet Adjustment
The flow-through outlets on your vehicle allow outside
air to enter your vehicle while it is moving. Outside
air will also enter your vehicle while the air conditioning
compressor is running.
Use the thumbwheel on
the outlets to change the
direction of the air flow.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the
air inlets at the base of the windshield that
may block the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Lift up or push down on the thumbwheel located in the
center of the outlet to direct the air up or down, or
slide the thumbwheel to the left or right to direct the
airflow from side-to-side.
3-21
Warning Lights, Gages,
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they are working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-22
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle may also have a DIC that works along with
the warning lights and gages. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-37 for more information.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know
how fast you are going, about how much fuel you have used, and many other things you will need to know to drive
safely and economically.
United States automatic transmission version shown, Canada similar
3-23
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply press the trip information stem.
See “Odometer” under DIC Controls and Displays
on page 3-37 for more information.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then it must
be. But if it cannot, then it is set at zero, and a label
must be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Trip Odometer
Your vehicle has a trip odometer that can tell you how
far your vehicle has been driven since you last set
the trip odometer to zero.
To view the trip odometer, press the trip odometer reset
stem until TRIP is displayed. To reset the current trip
odometer, hold the reset stem. See “Trip Odometer”
under DIC Controls and Displays on page 3-37 for
more information.
3-24
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to ON or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to fasten
their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash until the
driver’s safety belt is
buckled.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the air bag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the air bag sensors, the air
bag modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the air bag
systems, see Air Bag Systems on page 1-60.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your air
bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the air bag system
may not be working properly. The air bags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away if the air bag
readiness light stays on after you start your
vehicle.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-25
Air Bag Off Light
Regular Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models without Rear Seats
When you turn the air bag off switch to the off position,
the off indictor will come on and stay on to remind
you that the air bag has been turned off. When you turn
the air bag off switch to the auto position, the on
indicator will come on. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-70 for more on this, including important safety
information.
{CAUTION:
If the right front passenger’s frontal air bag is
turned off for a person who is not in a risk
group identified by the national government,
that person will not have the extra protection
of an air bag. In a crash, the frontal air bag
would not be able to inflate and help protect
the person sitting there.
Do not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal air bag unless the person sitting there
is in a risk group identified by the national
government. See Air Bag Off Switch on
page 1-70 for more on this, including important
safety information.
3-26
Battery Warning Light
{CAUTION:
If the air bag readiness light ever comes on
when you have turned off the air bag, it means
that something may be wrong with the air bag
system. The right front passenger’s frontal air
bag could inflate even though the switch is off.
If this ever happens, do not let anyone whom
the national government has identified as a
member of a passenger air bag risk group sit
in the right front passenger’s position (for
example, do not secure a rear-facing child
restraint in the right front passenger’s seat)
until you have your vehicle serviced.
This light will come on
briefly when you start the
vehicle, as a check to
show you it is working;
then it should go out.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked right away. Driving while this light is
on could drain your battery and result in a vehicle that
may stall.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and climate control system.
3-27
Up-Shift Light
(Manual Transmission)
This light appears when
you need to shift to the
next higher gear on
a manual transmission
vehicle.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could be a brake
problem. Have your brake system inspected right away.
Shifting when the indicator light is on will help you get
the best fuel economy. See “Up-Shift Light” under
Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-24 for
more information.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal
is harder to push, or the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still
on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the light is still on after you
have pulled off the road and stopped carefully,
have the vehicle towed for service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on briefly when
you start your engine to
show it is working.
Then it will turn off.
This is normal.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake
system warning light isn’t on, you still have brakes,
but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake
system warning light is also on, you don’t have
anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with your regular
brakes. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should
come on briefly when you turn the ignition key to ON.
If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it
will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-29
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage shows the
engine coolant
temperature.
If the gage pointer is near the top of the gage, the
engine is too hot. It means that your engine coolant has
overheated. If you have been operating your vehicle
under normal driving conditions, you should pull off the
road, stop your vehicle and turn off the engine as
soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more
information.
3-30
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board DiagnosticsSecond Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at acceptable levels for the life of
the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.
The check engine light comes on to indicate that
there is a problem and service is required. Malfunctions
often will be indicated by the system before any
problem is apparent. This may prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed to
assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you
it is working, when the ignition is on and the engine
is not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
3-31
If the Light is Flashing
If the Light Is On Steady
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
•
•
•
•
Reducing vehicle speed.
Avoiding hard accelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
3-32
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality
will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-33
Oil Pressure Light
This light tells you if there
could be a problem with
your engine oil pressure.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
3-34
The light goes on when you turn your key to ON or
START. It goes off once you start your engine. That’s a
check to be sure the light works. If it doesn’t come
on, be sure to have it fixed so it will be there to warn
you if something goes wrong.
When the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil
isn’t flowing through your engine properly. You could
be low on oil and you might have some other system
problem. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 and “OIL” under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-39 for more
information.
Security Light
Cruise Control Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn the
key to START. The light
will stay on until the
engine starts.
If the ignition is turned on, and the light flashes, the
Passlock® system has entered a tamper mode. If the
vehicle fails to start, see Passlock® on page 2-16.
If the light comes on continuously while driving and stays
on, there may be a problem with the Passlock®
system. Your vehicle will not be protected by Passlock®,
and you should see your dealer.
This symbol appears on
your instrument panel
whenever you set
your cruise control. See
“Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction
Lever on page 3-5.
Highbeam On Light
This light comes on
whenever the high-beam
headlamps are on.
Also, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-14 for
additional information regarding the security light.
3-35
Daytime Running Lamps
Indicator Light
This light turns on
whenever the Daytime
Running Lamps are on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
None of these indicate a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
See “Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)” under Exterior
Lamps on page 3-12 for more information.
Fuel Gage
When the ignition is on,
the fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have remaining in the
fuel tank.
3-36
speed up.
• The gage does not go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
When the fuel in the fuel tank is low, you will see a
LOW FUEL message on the Driver Information
Center (DIC) display. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-39 for more information.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Trip Information
The DIC display is located on the instrument panel
cluster. The DIC can display information such as the trip
odometer, and personalization features.
Odometer
DIC Controls and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay the DIC will display
the current driver and the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
If a problem is detected, a warning message will appear
on the display. Pressing and releasing the trip
odometer reset stem on the DIC will acknowledge any
current warning or service messages.
The odometer is automatically displayed on the DIC
when you start the vehicle. The odometer shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip Odometer
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP appears
on the DIC display. This shows the current distance
traveled since the last reset of the trip odometer in either
miles or kilometers.
Press and hold the reset stem for approximately
four seconds to reset the trip odometer.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the trip odometer reset stem on the DIC.
These modes are explained following. The DIC trip
odometer reset stem is located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the DIC display. To scroll through the
available functions, press and release the reset stem.
3-37
GM Oil Life System™
Automatic Door Locks
Press the reset stem until OIL LIFE appears (flashing)
on the display. The GM Oil Life System™ shows
an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. It will show
100% when the system is reset after an oil change.
It will alert you to change your oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
With the vehicle’s engine off, and the ignition in the
LOCK position, press and hold the power door
lock button for approximately 3 seconds until the DIC
displays the current door lock mode. Then press
the reset stem for approximately two seconds to switch
modes. The following are the mode choices:
Always reset the engine oil life after an oil change.
To reset the oil life system press and hold the reset
stem while OIL LIFE is displayed. The system will
reset and a beep will sound.
Mode 1 (default): Lock all doors when the vehicle is
shifted out of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission,
or when vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph
(24km/h) with a manual transmission. Doors will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) with an
automatic transmission, or when the ignition key is
removed on a manual transmission.
The DIC does not replace the need to maintain your
vehicle as recommended in the Maintenance Schedule
in this manual. The oil change reminder will not
detect dusty conditions or engine malfunctions that may
affect the oil. Also, the oil change reminder does not
measure how much oil you have in your engine. So, be
sure to check your oil level often. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13 for more information.
Mode 2: Turns off the automatic door locks.
Mode 3: Lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted out
of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission, or
when vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24km/h)
with a manual transmission. Driver’s door will unlock
when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P) with an
automatic transmission, or when the ignition key is
removed on a manual transmission.
Mode 4: Lock all doors when the vehicle is shifted out
of PARK (P) with an automatic transmission, or
when the vehicle speed is greater than 15 mph (24km/h)
with a manual transmission. No doors will unlock.
3-38
Language
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF
You can choose the language in which the DIC
information is displayed. Press the reset stem until
LANGUAGE is displayed. While LANGUAGE is on
the display, press and hold the reset stem until
the language changes from ENGLISH to the language
you desire. You can choose from English, Spanish,
or French.
This message will be displayed when the engine coolant
temperature is too high and the air conditioning in
your vehicle needs to be turned off. See and Engine
Overheating on page 5-28 and Climate Control System
on page 3-18 for more information. It will be displayed
along with the ENG HOT message.
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message will be displayed on the DIC if there is a
problem with your antilock brake system. Check your
antilock brake system as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced. See Brakes on page 5-38
and Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-29 for more information. Pressing the reset
stem to acknowledge this message and clear it from
the DIC display.
Warning messages are displayed on the DIC to notify
the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and
that some action may be needed by the driver to
correct the condition. More than one message may
appear at one time. They will appear one after the other.
The messages are displayed for three seconds each.
Some messages may not require immediate action
but you should press and release the trip odometer reset
stem to acknowledge that you received the message
and clear it from the display. Each message must
be acknowledged individually. Some messages cannot
be cleared from the display because they are more
urgent. These messages require action before they can
be removed from the DIC display. The following are
the possible messages that can be displayed and some
information about them.
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
BATTERY
This message will be displayed when there is a problem
with your vehicle’s battery. See Battery on page 5-41
and Battery Warning Light on page 3-27 for more
information.
3-39
BRAKES
ENG (Engine) HOT
This message will be displayed on the DIC if there is a
problem with your brakes. Check your brakes as
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
See Brakes on page 5-38 and Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-28 for more information. Press and
release the reset stem to acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed on your DIC when your
engine coolant temperature is hot. Check your engine
coolant temperature gage. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-30 for more information.
You should have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible if you suspect your engine is overheating. See
Engine Overheating on page 5-28 for more information.
CHANGE OIL
FLUID
This message will be displayed on your DIC when the
oil needs to be changed. Check the oil in your vehicle as
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced. See
Engine Oil on page 5-13 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more information. Press the reset stem
to acknowledge the message and clear it from the
display.
This message will be displayed on the DIC if your brake
fluid is low. Check the brake fluid as soon as possible
and have your vehicle serviced. See Brakes on
page 5-38 for more information. Press the reset stem to
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display.
DOORS
This message will be displayed on your DIC when one
of your doors is ajar. You should check all the doors
on your vehicle to make sure they are closed. Press the
reset stem to acknowledge the message and clear it
from the display.
3-40
FUEL CAP
This message will be displayed if your vehicle’s fuel cap
is either off or loose. You should pull over and check
to see if your vehicle’s fuel cap is secure as soon
as possible. You may also see the check engine light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-30 for more information.
Press the reset stem to acknowledge the message and
clear it from the display.
LOW FUEL
PARK BRK (Brake)
This message will be displayed on your DIC if the level
of fuel in your vehicle is low. You should also check
your fuel gage. See Fuel Gage on page 3-36 for more
information. You should fill your vehicle’s tank as
soon as possible.
This message will be displayed when your vehicle’s
parking brake is active. See Parking Brake on page 2-29
and Brake System Warning Light on page 3-28 for
more information. Press the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
LOW TRAC (Traction)
REDUCED POWER
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you will
see this message when the TCS is active. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for more information.
Press and release the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
This message will be displayed on your DIC when your
vehicle’s engine power is reduced. Press the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the display.
OIL
This message will be displayed when your oil pressure
is low. See Oil Pressure Light on page 3-34, and
Engine Oil on page 5-13 for more information.
OIL LIFE
This message will be displayed when your GM Oil Life
System needs to be checked. Press the reset stem
to acknowledge the message. For more information,
see “GM Oil Life System” under DIC Controls and
Displays on page 3-37.
SERV (Service) 4WD
(Four-Wheel Drive)
This message will be displayed on your DIC when there
is a problem with your transfer case control system.
Check the transfer case on your vehicle and have
it serviced. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for more
information about your transfer case. Press the reset
stem to acknowledge the message and clear it from
the display.
3-41
TRACTION FAULT
Audio System(s)
If you have the Traction Control System (TCS), you may
see this message if there is a problem with your
Traction Control System (TCS). Check your TCS as
soon as possible and have your vehicle serviced.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9 for
more information. Press the reset stem to acknowledge
the message and clear it from the display.
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to
your vehicle – like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio – be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important
to do it properly. Added sound equipment may
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine,
radio or other systems, and even damage them.
Your vehicle’s systems may interfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been added
improperly.
SERV VEH (Service Vehicle)
This message will be displayed on your DIC if your
vehicle needs service. You should have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
TURN SIGNAL
This message will be displayed on your DIC when your
turn signal is on for approximately 0.75 miles (1.2 km)
of travel. Press the reset stem to acknowledge the
message and clear it from the display.
3-42
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to check federal rules
covering mobile radio and telephone units.
Your audio system has been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Figure out which radio you have in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls to be sure you are getting the most out of
the advanced engineering that went into it.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. To display the time with
the ignition off, press RCL, HR, or MIN and the time will
appear on the display for a few seconds. There is an
initial two-second delay before the clock goes into
time-set mode.
Your radio may have a button marked with an H or
HR to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time may be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and hold
the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this time,
press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another 2 seconds. If the time is
not available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear
on the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. Once you have
tuned to an RDS broadcast station, it may take a
few minutes for your time to update.
3-43
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Playing the Radio
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease volume.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either
SEEK arrow again to stop scanning presets.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Time display is available with the ignition turned off.
The radio will seek and scan only to stations that are
in the selected band and only to those with a strong
signal.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
3-44
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) by performing the
following steps:
AUDIO: To adjust bass and treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero or T
and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting
for the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until you
hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
3-45
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): Your audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that your radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
Theftlock® system has locked up. Your vehicle must be
returned to the dealer for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L and a zero
or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust both tone controls and both speaker controls
to the middle position, end out of audio by waiting for
the display to change to the time display. Then press
and hold AUDIO for more than two seconds until
you hear a beep. CEN will appear on the display.
Fade may not be available if you have a regular cab model.
3-46
Radio with CD
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume,
as necessary, to overcome noise at any speed.
The volume level should always sound the same to you
as you drive. NONE will appear on the display if the
radio cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you do not
want to use automatic volume, select OFF.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
q VOL r (Volume):
Turn this knob to increase or
to decrease volume.
For RDS, press the DISPL knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
To change the default on the display, press the DISPL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
3-47
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), by performing the
following steps:
q TUNE r:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
q SEEK r:
Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
q SCAN r:
Press and hold either arrow for
more than two seconds. SCAN will appear on the
display and you will hear one beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds. PSCN will appear on
the display and you will hear two beeps. The radio will
go to the first preset station, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. Press either arrow
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-48
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return
and the equalization that you selected will be
automatically stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass and treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. All will appear on the
display and you will hear a beep with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble,
returns the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
the radio produces one beep. The balance and fade
will be adjusted to the middle position and the display
will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. All will appear on
the display and you will hear a beep with the level
display in the middle position.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
3-49
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the
following:
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-50
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button or either SEEK arrow to
take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press the SEEK TYPE
button once. If the PTY is not displayed, press
the SEEK TYPE button twice to display the PTY and
then to go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will search for
stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: You can scan the stations within a PTY by
performing the following:
1. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These pushbuttons have factory
PTY presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
six FM2) by performing the following steps:
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio will scan
for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-51
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on the
display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press
the INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words will
appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, the information
symbol will disappear from the display until another
3-52
new message is received. The old message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view an
old message until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will appear on the display.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
radio will stop and TRAF will be displayed. When a
traffic announcement comes on the tuned radio station
you will hear it. If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC
will appear on the display.
If TRAF is on the display you can press the TRAF
button to turn off the traffic announcements.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if
the volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a
CD if the last tuned station broadcasts traffic
announcements.
Radio Messages
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): Your audio system has
been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that your
radio has not been configured properly for your
vehicle and must be returned to the dealer for service.
The CD player can play the small 8 cm single CDs with
an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. You must return
to the dealer for service.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
The CD symbol will appear on the display. If you want
to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press the
eject button or the DISPL knob.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-53
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
start of the current track if it has been playing for
more than eight seconds. TRACK and the track number
will appear on the display. If you hold this pushbutton
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
3-54
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
ET and the elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
q SEEK r: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right arrow
to go to the start of the next track. If you hold either arrow
or press it more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
q SCAN r: Press and hold either SCAN arrow for
more than two seconds until SCAN appears on the
display and you hear a beep. Use this feature to listen
to 10 seconds of each track of the CD. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
DISPL (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display. To change
the default on the display (track or elapsed time),
press this knob until you see the display you want, then
hold the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The CD symbol will appear
on the display when a CD is loaded.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop a CD when it
is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off
if this button is pressed first.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
3-55
Radio with Six-Disc CD
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you do not want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOLUME: Turn this knob to increase or to decrease
volume.
3-56
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency and the time.
Press this knob with the ignition off to display the time.
To change the default on the display, press the RCL
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM. The display will show your selection.
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18 stations
(six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), by performing the
following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
1. Turn the radio on.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3. Tune in the desired station.
sSCAN t:
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the station you set will return
and the equalization that you selected will be
automatically stored for that pushbutton.
sSEEK t:
Press and hold either SCAN arrow
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play for
a few seconds, then go on to the next station. Press
either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display and you will hear a double
beep. The radio will go to a preset station stored on
your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow
again to stop scanning presets.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
3-57
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS,
MID, or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob
to increase or to decrease. The display will show
the bass, midrange, or treble level. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may want to decrease the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance to the right and the
left speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass, midrange, and treble to the
middle position, push the AUDIO knob. The radio will
produce one beep and adjust the display level to
the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To return the bass and treble to the custom mode,
press and release the AUDIO knob, until CUSTOM
appears on the display.
3-58
To adjust the fade to the front and the rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound
toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. CENTERED will
appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
Radio Data System (RDS)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that PTY
and the PTY is displayed, press either SEEK arrow
once. If the PTY is not displayed, press either
SEEK arrow twice to display the PTY and then to
go to another station.
5. Press P-TYPE to exit program type select mode.
If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
With RDS, your radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
• Seek to stations with traffic announcements
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or the call letters will appear on the display instead
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You
may select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a CD, the last selected RDS station will
interrupt play if that selected program type format
is broadcast.
3-59
SCAN: You can also scan through the stations within a
PTY by performing the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
Setting Preset PTYs
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite PTYs. These pushbuttons have factory PTY
presets. You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FM1 and
six FM2) by performing the following steps:
2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and hold
either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
scanning the stations in the PTY.
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.
3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
scan for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
3-60
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop
during the announcement. You will not be able to turn
off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message at your own speed, press the
INFO button repeatedly. A new group of words
will appear on the display with each press. Once the
complete message has been displayed, INFO will
disappear from the display until another new message
is received. The old message can be displayed by
pressing the INFO button. You can view an old message
until a new message is received or a different station
is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF appears on the display,
the tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements.
To receive the traffic announcement from the tuned
station, press this button. Brackets will be displayed
around TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes
on the tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, the
radio will stop and brackets will be displayed around
TRAF. When a traffic announcement comes on
the tuned radio station you will hear it. If no station is
found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not, you
can then press the TRAF button to remove the brackets
or use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to go to a
station that supports traffic announcements. If no station
is found, NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Your radio will play the traffic announcement even if the
volume is low. Your radio will interrupt the play of a CD if
the last tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements
and the brackets are displayed.
3-61
Playing a CD
The CD player can play the smaller 8 cm single CDs
with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the smaller CDs
are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. You may experience an
increase in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks and/or
difficulty in loading and ejecting. If these problems occur
try a known good CD.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Do not play 3 inch CDs without a standard adapter CD.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press the LOAD button to load CDs into the CD
player. This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
3-62
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If you select an equalization setting for your
CD, it will be activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash and LOAD
ALL will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
4. Once the CD is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another CD. The CD player takes
up to six CDs. Do not try to load more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
CDs, press the LOAD button to cancel the loading
function. The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. If more than one CD has been loaded,
a number for each CD will appear on the display. If you
select an equalization setting for your CD, it will be
activated each time you play a CD.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD you want to play. A small bar will
appear under the CD number that is playing, and the
track number will appear.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Z (Eject): Press the CD eject button to eject a
single CD or multiple CDs. To eject the CD that is
currently playing, press and release this button. To eject
multiple CDs, press and hold this button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light will flash to let you
know when a CD is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will appear on the display. You can
now remove the CD. If the CD is not removed, after
25 seconds, the CD will be automatically pulled back into
the receiver. If you try to push the CD back into the
receiver, before the 25 second time period is complete,
the receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the
CD several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD button to eject a CD after
you have tried to push it in manually. The receivers
25-second eject timer will reset at each press of eject,
which will cause the receiver to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the CD is ejected, remove the
CD. After removing the CD, push the PWR knob off and
then on again. This will clear the CD-sensing feature and
enable CDs to be loaded into the player again.
3-63
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire CD. To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
3-64
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
sSEEK t:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of the
current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you hold
either arrow or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
sSCAN t:
To scan one CD, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until CD SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track of
each CD loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track or elapsed time), press this
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to play the radio when a
CD(s) is in the player. The inactive CD(s) will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button
to turn it off.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds to save the track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of continuously
pressing SONG LIST, two beeps will sound
to confirm that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display, if you try
to save more than 20 selections.
3-65
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to
the song list, the track will be added to the end of
the list.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
3-66
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds and a final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smooth, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays an
error message, write it down and provide it to your
dealer when reporting the problem.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(Non-RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOC will appear on the display.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
(RDS Radios)
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOCKED will appear on the display.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-67
Radio Reception
Care of Your CD Player
AM
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can
pick up noise from things like storms and power lines.
Try reducing the treble to reduce this noise.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original
cases or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
3-68
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Chime Level Adjustment
The radio is the vehicle chime producer. To change the
volume level, press and hold pushbutton 6 with the
ignition on and the radio power off. The chime volume
level will change from the normal level to loud, and LOUD
will appear on the display. To change back to the default
or normal setting, press and hold pushbutton 6 again.
The chime level will change from the loud level to normal,
and NORMAL will appear on the display. Each time the
chime volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the radio
and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime module
will disable vehicle chimes.
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking .........................................................4-6
Traction Control System (TCS) .........................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-10
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-12
Passing .......................................................4-13
Loss of Control .............................................4-14
Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle ....................................................4-15
Driving at Night ............................................4-29
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-31
City Driving ..................................................4-34
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-35
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-36
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-38
Winter Driving ..............................................4-40
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-44
Towing ..........................................................4-47
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-47
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-47
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-52
Truck-Camper Loading Information ..................4-59
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-59
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab ..................4-59
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-60
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-11.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver,
in both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task — such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor — makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
4-3
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin or vodka.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the
person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
4-4
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night.
All drivers are impaired at BAC levels above
0.05 percent. Statistics show that the chance of being
in a collision increases sharply for drivers who have
a BAC of 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC
level of 0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance
of having a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,
the chance of this driver having a collision is 12 times
greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, the chance is
25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less with one driver
and as long as two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle moving
at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That
could be a lot of distance in an emergency, so keeping
enough space between your vehicle and others is
important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it is pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);
tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice,
it is easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Anti-lock Brake System
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-29.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-8
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system reduces engine power and may also upshift the
transmission to limit wheel spin.
You may feel or hear the system working, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more
than even the very best braking.
The TCS button is located on your instrument panel.
Press this button to turn the TCS off and on.
When the traction control system is turned off,
an indicator light on the button will illuminate.
4-9
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control” under
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-5.
TCS operates in all transmission shift lever positions.
But the system can upshift the transmission only as high
as the shift lever position you have chosen, so you
should use the lower gears only when necessary.
See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-21
and/or Manual Transmission Operation on page 2-24
for more information.
If there is a problem with TCS, TRACTION/FAULT will
be displayed on your Driver Information Center
(DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-39
for more information.
When this warning is displayed, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
To limit wheel spin, especially in slippery road conditions,
you should always leave TCS on. But you can turn the
system off if you ever need to. You should turn the
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud or
snow and rocking the vehicle is required. See “Rocking
Your Vehicle To Get It Out” under If You Are Stuck:
In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-44.
4-10
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you are
in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you will want to go
slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can not; there is not
room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as much
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off
the edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are
driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
4-13
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder,
and start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are far
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its
front in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right
lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror is
convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem to
be farther away from you than it really is.)
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes,
steering and acceleration) do not have enough friction
where the tires meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
4-14
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” — and slow
down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have
four-wheel drive.
Also, see Anti-Lock Brakes under Braking on page 4-6.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive, you
should not drive off-road unless you are on a level,
solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions.
These will help make your off-road driving safer and
more enjoyable.
4-15
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out.
For example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if so equipped) are properly
attached. Be sure you read all the information about
your four-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual. Is
there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What are
the local laws that apply to off-roading where you
will be driving? If you do not know, you should check
with law enforcement people in the area. Will you be
on someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get
the necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
4-16
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52 and Tires
on page 5-57.
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. GM recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage
the environment — shrubs, flowers, trees,
grasses — or disturb wildlife (this includes
wheel-spinning, breaking down trees or
unnecessary driving through streams or over
soft ground).
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to read
the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse
is removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from the
heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-17
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals.
Your eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the
terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to
listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
4-18
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you’re
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can
be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can startle
you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
(There is more discussion of these subjects later.)
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction
quickly?
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or
other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your
hands if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you can not control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and driving
skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment can
be affected by even a small amount of alcohol.
You could have a serious — or even fatal — accident
if you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
4-19
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Approaching a Hill
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
can not do. There are some hills that simply can not be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb,
descend or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge.
On a very small hill, for example, there may be a
smooth, constant incline with only a small change in
elevation where you can easily see all the way to
the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as
you near the top, but you may not see this because the
crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so you
will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path (boulders, trees, logs or ruts)?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you can not control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
4-20
Driving Uphill
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill,
you need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering
wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to start
spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the top of
the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill
to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down
and stay alert.
4-21
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I can not make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it
from rolling backwards. Also, apply the parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and slowly
back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need to
restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to
PARK (P) (or shift to neutral if your vehicle has a
manual transmission) and restart the engine. Then,
shift to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is best
that you back down the hill with your wheels straight
rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the
wheel too far to the left or right will increase the
possibility of a rollover.
4-22
Here are some things you must not do if you stall, or
are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) (or pressing the clutch, if you have a
manual transmission) to “rev-up” the engine and
regain forward momentum. This will not work.
Your vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and
you could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the vehicle.
Then apply the parking brake. Shift to REVERSE (R),
release the parking brake, and slowly back straight
down.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about to stall
when going up a hill. If the hill is steep enough to stall
your vehicle, it is steep enough to cause you to roll
over if you turn around. If you can not make it up the
hill, you must back straight down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down the
hill and decide I just can not do it. What should
I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission
in PARK (P) (or the manual transmission in
FIRST (1)) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill.
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain
vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden
creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), or with the clutch pedal pressed
down with a manual transmission. This is called
“free-wheeling.” Your brakes will have to do all the
work and could overheat and fade.
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a serious
accident. Apply the brakes lightly when
descending a hill and use a low gear to keep
vehicle speed under control.
4-23
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill. But if
it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
• Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
• Shift to PARK (P) (or to neutral with the manual
transmission) and, while still braking, restart the
engine.
• Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
• If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go across
the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have to
decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down may be
too steep to drive across. When you go straight up
or down a hill, the length of the wheel base
(the distance from the front wheels to the rear
wheels) reduces the likelihood the vehicle
will tumble end over end. But when you drive
across an incline, the much more narrow track width
(the distance between the left and right wheels)
may not prevent the vehicle from tilting and rolling
over. Also, driving across an incline puts more
weight on the downhill wheels. This could cause a
downhill slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways,
it can hit something that will trip it (a rock, a rut, etc.)
and roll over.
4-24
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock with the
uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels drop into a rut
or depression, your vehicle can tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because the
trail goes across the incline does not mean you have to
drive it. The last vehicle to try it might have rolled over.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A:
If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
4-25
Stalling on an Incline
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you (and your passengers) get out on the uphill
side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you
get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll
over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
4-26
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
will not get good traction. You can not accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need
longer braking distances.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that you
will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you do
not get stuck.
{CAUTION:
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand (as
on beaches or sand dunes) your tires will tend to sink
into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds or rivers can be
dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken
the ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice
and you and your passengers could drown.
Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-27
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
{CAUTION:
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle
downstream and you and your passengers
could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can
still wash away the ground from under your
tires, and you could lose traction and roll the
vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing
water.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it.
At faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if
you get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to
start your engine. When you go through water,
remember that when your brakes get wet, it may take
you longer to stop.
4-28
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-31
for more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Driving at Night
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the
underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the maintenance schedule
for additional information.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-29
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you can not see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your headlamps can light up only so much
road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in
bright sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses.
4-30
Your eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night.
But if you are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night.
They may cut down on glare from headlamps, but
they also make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When you
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who does
not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with misaimed
headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid staring directly into
the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
And, if your tires do not have much tread left, you will get
even less traction. It is always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts to fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for driving on dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if
your windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and
even people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer tank filled with
washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you can not stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on dry roads.
4-31
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can not, try to slow down before you
hit them.
4-32
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles or other vehicles, and
raindrops “dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can not avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
•
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth. See Tires
on page 5-57.
4-33
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for
a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-35.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-34
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
4-35
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are
going slower than you actually are.
4-36
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
Highway Hypnosis
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with the
same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the road,
the drone of the engine, and the rush of the wind against
the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do not let it happen
to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the road in less
than a second, and you could crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on
page 4-15 for information about driving off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-38
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Shift down to let your engine assist your
brakes on a steep downhill slope.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have your engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert.
There could be something in your lane,
like a stalled car or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
4-39
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet
or a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction.
Be sure you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You will have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-57.
4-40
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Even though you have an anti-lock braking system,
you will want to begin stopping sooner than you would
on dry pavement. See Braking on page 4-6.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
What is the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer
the least traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is
about freezing (32°F; 0°C) and freezing rain begins
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand
crews can get there.
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun can not reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads are
clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you, brake
before you are on it. Try not to brake while you are
actually on the ice, and avoid sudden steering
maneuvers.
4-41
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
4-42
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can not see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly.
This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and it keeps
the battery charged. You will need a well-charged battery
to restart the vehicle, and possibly for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or
so until help comes.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-43
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
CAUTION:
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out when you are stuck,
but you must use caution.
That could cause an engine compartment fire
or other damage. When you are stuck, spin the
wheels as little as possible. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on
the speedometer.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed,
they can explode, and you or others could
be injured. And, the vehicle can overheat.
CAUTION:
4-44
(Continued)
(Continued)
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-72.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If you have a
four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into 4HI. If you have
traction control, turn the traction control system off.
See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 4-9.
Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a
forward gear (or with a manual transmission, between
FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R)), spinning
the wheels as little as possible. Release the accelerator
pedal while you shift, and press lightly on the
accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear.
By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward and
reverse directions, you will cause a rocking motion that
may free your vehicle. If that does not get you out
after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-47.
Using the Recovery Hooks
Your vehicle may be equipped with recovery hooks.
The hooks are provided at the front of your vehicle.
You may need to use them if you are stuck off-road
and need to be pulled to some place where you
can continue driving.
4-45
{CAUTION:
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-46
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy (towing your vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly (towing
your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed.
4-47
Dinghy Towing
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Use the following steps to tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground:
1. Drive the vehicle to be towed into position behind
the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground, the drivetrain components could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not tow your vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-48
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle
is in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for
more information.
Dolly Towing
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing
your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never exceed
55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK. To prevent your
battery from draining while towing, remove the
RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the instrument
panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuse
when you reach your destination. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-104 for more information.
After towing see “Shifting out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Two-wheel drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-49
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Front Towing (Front Wheels Off the Ground)
Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle from
the front:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the dolly.
2. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
3. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle.
4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
(Continued)
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for instructions.
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
CAUTION:
4-50
CAUTION:
(Continued)
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK. To prevent your
battery from draining while towing, remove the
RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the instrument
panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuse
when you reach your destination See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-104 for more information.
Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)
3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-29 for more information.
4. Put an automatic transmission in PARK (P) or a
manual transmission in FIRST (1).
{CAUTION:
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Use the following steps to dolly tow your vehicle from
the rear:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the dolly.
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in Park (P) for
an automatic transmission, or if your vehicle is
in gear, for a manual transmission. You or
others could be injured. Make sure the parking
brake is firmly set before you shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to 2HI. See Four-Wheel
Drive on page 2-26 for instructions.
2. Follow the dolly manufacturer’s instructions to
attach and secure the vehicle being towed to
the dolly and then the loaded dolly to the tow
vehicle.
4-51
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
Notice: If you exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
7. Turn the ignition to LOCK. To prevent your
battery from draining while towing, remove the
RDO BATT and CLSTR fuses from the instrument
panel fuse block. Be sure to replace the fuse
when you reach your destination See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-104 for more information.
After towing see “Shifting out of NEUTRAL” under
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26.
4-52
Loading Your Vehicle
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information is attached to the
driver’s side center pillar, below the door latch post.
Vehicle’s without a center pillar, extended cab models,
will have the Tire and Loading Information label attached
to the edge of the driver’s side third door, above the door
latch post. This label lists the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and the total weight it can carry.
This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight.
The Tire and Loading Information label also tells you
the size and recommended inflation pressure for
the original equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-57
and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight
If your vehicle does not have the Tire and Loading
Information label, the Certification/Tire label shows the
tire size and recommended inflation pressures
needed to obtain the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axles. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
4-53
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Towing a Trailer on page 4-60 for important
information on towing a trailer, towing safety,
and trailering tips.
4-54
Example 1
Loading Your Vehicle
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 2 =
300 lbs (136 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
700 lbs. (317 kg)
Item
Example 2
Example 3
Loading Your Vehicle
Loading Your Vehicle
Description
Total
Item
Description
Total
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 5 =
750 lbs (340 kg)
B
Subtract Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) x 5 =
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Available Cargo Weight =
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-55
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
If you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out.
The Certification/Tire label is attached to the bottom
section of the center pillar, on the driver’s side of
the vehicle. Vehicles without a center pillar, extended
cab models, will have the Certification/Tire label
attached to the edge of the driver’s side, third door,
below the door latch post. The label shows the size of
your original tires and the inflation pressures needed
to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle.
This is called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel, cargo and trailer tongue weight,
if pulling a trailer.
4-56
Similar appearing vehicles may have different GVWRs
and payloads. Please note your vehicle’s Certification/
Tire label or consult your dealer for additional details.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle–like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else–they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There’s also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving with Your
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicle on page 4-15.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Payload
This is the maximum load capacity that your vehicle can
carry. Be sure to include the weight of the occupants
as part of your load. If you added any accessories
or equipment after your vehicle left the factory,
remember to subtract the weight of these things from
the payload. Your dealer can help you with this.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight rating
(GAWR) of the front or rear axle.
4-57
Two-Tiered Loading
Add-On Equipment
By positioning four 2” X 6” wooden planks across the
width of the pickup box, you can create an upper
load platform. The planks must be inserted in the pickup
box depressions. The length of the planks must allow
for at least a 3/4 inch (2 cm) bearing surface on
each end of the plank.
When you carry removable items, you may need to put
a limit on how many people you carry inside your
vehicle. Be sure to weigh your vehicle before you buy
and install the new equipment.
When using this upper load platform, be sure the load is
securely tied down to prevent it from shifting. The load’s
center of gravity should be positioned in a zone over
the rear axle.
Any load that extends beyond the vehicle’s taillamp
area must be properly marked according to local laws
and regulations.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) of the rear axle.
4-58
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
Remember not to exceed the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) of the rear axle.
Truck-Camper Loading Information
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab
Your vehicle was not designed to carry a slide-in
camper.
General Motors is aware that some vehicle owners may
consider having the pickup box removed and a
commercial or recreational body installed. However, we
recommend that conversions of this type not be done
to pickups. Owners should be aware that, as
manufactured, there are differences between a chassis
cab and a pickup with the box removed which may
affect vehicle safety. For specific information on
this pickup, contact GM Customer Assistance.
See Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Trailer Recommendations
You must subtract your hitch load from the CWR for
your vehicle. Weigh your vehicle with your trailer
attached, so that you won’t go over the GVWR or the
GAWR.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose the
correct hitch and trailer brakes.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60
later in this section.
4-59
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs that would
not be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the instructions in this section and check with your
dealer for more information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-60
To identify what the vehicle trailering capacity is for your
vehicle, you should read the information in “Weight of
the Trailer” that appears later in this section.
If yours was built with trailering options, as many are,
it’s ready for heavier trailers. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully before
you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You may want to shift the transmission to THIRD (3)
or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if the
transmission shifts too often (e.g., under heavy
loads and/or hilly conditions). If you have a manual
transmission and you are towing a trailer, it’s
better not to use the highest gear.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer,
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and
how much your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
The following chart shows how much your trailer can
weigh, based upon your vehicle model and options.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
The weight of the trailer tongue also affects trailering
capacity. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” next.
4-61
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
3,500 lbs. (1 587 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 855 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.42
2,000 lbs. (907 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,500 lbs. (1 133 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
3,500 lbs. (1 587 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
3,900 lbs. (1 769 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
3,200 lbs. (1 451 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
2WD Regular Cab
Vehicle*
2WD Extended Cab
4-62
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.42
1,700 lbs. (771 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,200 lbs. (997 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
3,200 lbs. (1 451 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
3,600 lbs. (1 633 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
3,100 lbs. (1 406 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.42
1,600 lbs. (725 kg)
5,500 lbs. (2 495 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,100 lbs. (952 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Vehicle*
®
2WD Crew Cab
4-63
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
3,100 lbs. (1 406 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
3,100 lbs. (1 406 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,100 lbs. (952 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
2,100 lbs. (952 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
3,100 lbs. (1 406 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
3,600 lbs. (1 632 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
4.10
3,500 lbs. (1 587 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
4WD Regular Cab
4-64
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,900 lbs. (1 315 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
2,900 lbs. (1 315 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
1,900 lbs. (861 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 722 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
2,900 lbs. (1 315 kg)
7,000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
3,400 lbs. (1 542 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
Manual Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
4.10
3,300 lbs. (1 496 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
4WD Extended Cab
4-65
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR**
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
3.73
2,800 lbs. (1 270 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
2,800 lbs. (1 270 kg)
7 000 lbs. (3 175 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.42
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 856 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
3.73
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Automatic Transmission,
3.5 L Engine
4.10
4,000 lbs. (1 814 kg)
9,000 lbs. (4 082 kg)
Manual Transmission,
2.8 L Engine
4.10
1,800 lbs. (816 kg)
6,000 lbs. (2 721 kg)
®
4WD Crew Cab
**The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the total allowable weight of the completely loaded vehicle and
trailer including any passengers, cargo, equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your vehicle should not be
exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at the address listed in
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-66
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52 for more information about your vehicle’s
maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 500 lbs (226 kg) with a weight carrying hitch.
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
4-67
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t you may be able to get them right simply
by moving some of the items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
above the door latch, or see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
4-68
Weight-Distributing Hitches and
Weight Carrying Hitches
You can use your step bumper hitch for trailers up to
2,000 lbs (907 kg) total weight, and 200 lbs (90 kg)
tongue weight.
Notice: If you use a step-bumper hitch, your bumper
could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure you
have ample room when turning to avoid contact
between the trailer and the bumper.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer
manufacturer. For trailers up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg) you
may attach the safety chains to the attaching points
on the bumper. For heavier trailers, follow the trailer or
hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so you
can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains to drag
on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Driving with a Trailer
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brake – and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Your trailer’s brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand 3,000 psi
(20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inch (0.3 cc) of fluid from your vehicle’s
master cylinder. Otherwise, both braking systems
won’t work well. You could even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, then make the brake
fluid tap at the port on the master cylinder that
sends fluid to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper
tubing for this. If you do, it will bend and finally break off.
Use steel brake tubing.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-69
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders,
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
Backing Up
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have extra
wiring and a heavy-duty turn signal flasher.
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-70
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower
temperature than at normal altitudes. If you turn your
engine off immediately after towing at high altitude
on steep uphill grades, your vehicle may show signs
similar to engine overheating. To avoid this, let the
engine run while parked (preferably on level ground)
with the automatic transmission in PARK (P) (or the
manual transmission out of gear and the parking brake
applied) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gear for a manual
transmission. When parking uphill, turn your
wheels away from the curb. When parking downhill,
turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4-71
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P), or
REVERSE (R) for a manual transmission. See
Parking Brake on page 2-29 for more information.
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in
NEUTRAL. See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for
more information.
6. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks.
4-72
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transmission
fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belt,
cooling system and brake system. Each of these is
covered in this manual, and the Index will help you find
them quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to
review these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your
Vehicle ......................................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-5
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-6
Additives .......................................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling Your Tank ............................................5-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-13
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-19
Manual Transmission Fluid .............................5-22
Hydraulic Clutch (Manual Transmission) ...........5-24
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap ..................................5-28
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-35
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Rear Axle .......................................................5-47
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-48
Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Headlamps ..................................................5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps .............................5-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .........5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-53
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-54
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-55
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tires ..............................................................5-57
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-64
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-65
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-67
Buying New Tires .........................................5-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-70
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-70
Tire Chains ..................................................5-72
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-73
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-74
Spare Tire ...................................................5-93
Appearance Care ............................................5-94
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-95
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-97
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-97
5-2
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle ..............5-98
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-100
Finish Damage ...........................................5-100
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-101
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-102
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-103
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-103
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-103
Electrical System ..........................................5-103
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-103
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-104
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-104
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-108
Service
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-11.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-72.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
(Continued)
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
•
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
CAUTION:
5-4
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Gasoline Specifications
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide
Fuel Charter which is available from the Alliance
of Automobile Manufacturers at www.autoalliance.org.
Gasoline meeting these specifications could provide
improved driveability and emission control system
performance compared to other gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as
soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
Additives
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. You should not have to add anything to your
fuel. However, some gasolines contain only the
minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency regulations. General
Motors recommends that you buy gasolines that
are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems due
to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
5-6
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Filling Your Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island. Turn off your engine when
you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near
fuel or refueling your vehicle. Keep sparks,
flames and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle — this is against the law
in some places. Keep children away from the
fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
5-7
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged door
on the driver’s side of your vehicle.
While refueling, hang the cap by the tether from the
hook on the fuel filler door.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly to the left
(counterclockwise).
5-8
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any “hiss” noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible.
See Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle on page 5-98
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle. When filling
the tank do not overfill by squeezing in much more fuel
after the pump shuts off.
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make sure
you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. If the fuel cap is not properly installed,
FUEL CAP will appear on the DIC and the check engine
light will be lit on instrument panel cluster. See DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-39 and Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-30 for more information.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the
right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you get
the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-30.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill
your tank and wait a few seconds after you have
finished pumping before you remove the nozzle.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the
Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
4. Release the hood prop
from its retainer and
put the hood prop into
the slot in the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then lift the hood to relieve pressure on the
hood prop.
1. Pull the handle located inside the vehicle on the
lower left side of the instrument panel.
2. Release the secondary latch on the hood.
The secondary latch is located below the front
center of the hood.
Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood and
return the prop to its retainer.
Then, lower the hood down to close. It will latch when
dropped from about 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm)
without pressing on the hood.
3. Lift the hood.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 2.8 L engine, you’ll see:
2.8 L engine shown. 3.5 L engine similar
5-12
A. Windshield Washer Fluid. See Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-37.
B. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.
C. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (low in engine
compartment). See Power Steering Fluid on
page 5-36.
D. Transmission Fluid Dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on page 5-19 and Manual
Transmission Fluid on page 5-22.
E. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
F. Brake Fluid Reservoir. See Brakes on page 5-38.
G. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
H. Hydraulic Clutch Fluid Reservoir (If Equipped).
See Hydraulic Clutch (Manual Transmission) on
page 5-24.
I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/
Filter on page 5-18.
J. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine Oil on page 5-13.
K. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
L. Remote Negative (−) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
M. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42.
N. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 5-104.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-13
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for
the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the cross-hatched area (L),
then you will need to add at least one quart of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on
page 5-108.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above
the cross-hatched area that shows the proper
operating range, your engine could be damaged.
5-14
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle. However, if it is going to be
0°F (–18°C) or above and SAE 5W-30 is not
available, you may use SAE 10W-30.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
sup®
5-15
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE OIL message will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer has GM-trained people
who will perform this work using genuine GM parts and
reset the system. It is also important to check your
oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-16
How to Reset the CHANGE OIL Message
What to Do with Used Oil
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change your
engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation
occurs where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE
OIL message being turned on, reset the system.
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal of
oil products.
Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil
change. It will not reset itself. To reset the CHANGE OIL
message, do the following:
1. Display OIL LIFE on the DIC.
2. Press and hold the reset stem. The oil life will
change to 100% and a beep will sound.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE OIL message comes back on when you
start your vehicle, the engine oil life system has not
reset. Repeat the procedure.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask your
dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
5-17
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is located on the passenger’s
side of the engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for more information on location.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter every 15,000 miles
(24 140 km), and replace at 25,000 miles (40 000 km).
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
To remove the engine air cleaner/filter, do the following:
1. Unfasten the clips that hold the cover on and
remove the cover.
2. Lift out the engine air cleaner/filter.
3. Inspect or replace the air filter. See Normal
Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15
to determine which filter to use.
4. Reinstall the engine air cleaner/filter cover.
Fasten the clips to hold the cover in place.
5-18
Automatic Transmission Fluid
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it helps
to stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire
can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage
it. Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when
you are driving.
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4.
5-19
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause the
transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate
reading if you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic—especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
5-20
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it’s colder than 50°F (10°C), you
may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check the
fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
• Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
running.
• With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
• With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
• Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle has this symbol
on it.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT area or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
The transmission dipstick is located toward the rear of
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side of
the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-21
How to Add Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
When to Check
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid while
it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a reference.)
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, because fluid with that label is made
especially for your automatic transmission. Damage
caused by fluid other than DEXRON®-III is not
covered by your new vehicle warranty.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check” listed previously.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
5-22
A good time to have it checked is when the engine oil is
changed. However, the fluid in your manual transmission
doesn’t require changing.
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your GM dealership
service department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too little fluid could cause
the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an
accurate reading if you check your transmission
fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engine is off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enough for you to rest your fingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
How to Add Fluid
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully
seated.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Check that the lubricant level is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and be sure
it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described in the next steps.
5-23
Hydraulic Clutch
(Manual Transmission)
When to Check and What to Use
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
The hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this
symbol on it.
It is not necessary to regularly check clutch fluid unless
you suspect there is a leak in the system. Adding
fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
5-24
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often you should check the fluid level in your clutch
master cylinder reservoir and for the proper fluid.
See Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 and
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
How to Check and Add Fluid
The proper fluid should be added if the level does not
reach the bottom of the diaphragm when it’s in place in
the reservoir. See the instructions on the reservoir cap.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add
only DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-28.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
•
•
•
•
•
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
5-25
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and the proper coolant.
5-26
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
{CAUTION:
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. With the coolant recovery tank, you will
almost never have to add coolant at the
radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The coolant recovery tank is located toward the rear of
the engine compartment on the passenger’s side.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at FULL
COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is warm,
the level should be above the FULL COLD level.
5-27
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
see Cooling System on page 5-30.
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
5-28
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-30.
Your air conditioning may stop working if your engine is
too hot. This is normal and helps cool the engine.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or hear
no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See “Driving on Grades” under
Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL and let the
engine idle.
2. Turn off the air conditioning.
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
5-29
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. Push down the
accelerator until the engine speed is about twice as fast
as normal idle speed for at least three minutes while
you’re parked. If you still have the warning, turn off the
engine and get everyone out of the vehicle until it
cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
A. Coolant Recovery Tank
B. Engine Cooling Fan
C. Radiator Pressure Cap
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
5-30
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
When the engine is cold, the coolant level should be at
least up to the FULL COLD mark. If it isn’t, you may
have a leak at the pressure cap or in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere
else in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
CAUTION:
If there seems to be no leak, start the engine again.
The engine cooling fan speed should increase when idle
speed is doubled by pushing the accelerator pedal down.
If it doesn’t, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the
engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL®(silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
(Continued)
5-31
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of
clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL® engine coolant
at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25 for more information.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-32
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at the
FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper mixture
directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling system
is cool before you do it.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly.
They are under pressure, and if you turn the
radiator pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
radiator pressure cap, is hot. Wait for the
cooling system and radiator pressure cap to
cool if you ever have to turn the pressure cap.
5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
You can remove the
radiator pressure cap
when the cooling system,
including the upper
radiator hose,
is no longer hot.
If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the cap to remove it.
3. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
FULL COLD mark.
5. Reinstall the cap on the coolant recovery tank,
but leave the radiator pressure cap off.
1. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn.
5-34
Engine Fan Noise
This vehicle has a clutched engine cooling fan. When
the clutch is engaged, the fan spins faster to provide
more air to cool the engine. In most everyday driving
conditions, the clutch is not engaged. This improves fuel
economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy vehicle
loading, trailer towing and/or high outside temperatures,
the fan speed increases when the clutch engages.
So you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is
normal and should not be mistaken as the transmission
slipping or making extra shifts. It is merely the cooling
system functioning properly. The fan will slow down
when additional cooling is not required and the clutch
disengages.
6. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch disengages.
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.
Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of
the filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure to
secure it tightly.
5-35
Power Steering Fluid
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Then remove the cap again and look at the fluid
level on the dipstick.
The level should be between the ADD and FULL marks.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the level
up to the proper range.
What to Use
The power steering fluid reservoir is located near the
front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for power steering fluid reservoir location.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-36
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
So, it is not a good idea to “top off” your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add (or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3
brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for the location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
5-38
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Just look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not have your brake
system checked to see
if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the
MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See Appearance Care on page 5-94.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drum
brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle is moving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedal firmly).
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the rear
brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-40
Every time you make a brake stop, your brakes adjust
for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality GM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system — for
example, when your brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you do not, your brakes
may no longer work properly. For example, if someone
puts in brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle,
the balance between your front and rear brakes can
change — for the worse. The braking performance you
have come to expect can change in many other ways
if someone puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco® battery. When it is time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on
the original battery’s label. We recommend an
ACDelco® battery. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.
5-41
Vehicle Storage
Jump Starting
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 5-42
for tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature (Non-RDS Radios) on page 3-67 or
Theft-Deterrent Feature (RDS Radios) on page 3-67.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
5-42
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transmission in PARK (P) or a manual transmission
in NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or in the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on
each vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location of
the battery.
5-43
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the batteries have enough water.
You do not need to add water to the ACDelco®
battery (or batteries) installed in your new
vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure
the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that first. If you do
not, explosive gas could be present.
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you’ll
get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts too. And don’t connect the
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on the
dead battery because this can cause sparks.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
7. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the negative (-)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
negative (-) terminal
if the vehicle has one.
5-45
Don’t let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part, or to a remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Notice: If the jumper cables are removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and
damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Remove the jumper
cables in the correct order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other or other metal.
9. Connect the other end of the negative (-) cable at
least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the dead
battery, but not near engine parts that move.
The electrical connection is just as good there, and
the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for awhile.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-46
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you will need to add some lubricant. Add enough
lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler
plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13
to determine which kind of lubricant to use.
5-47
Four-Wheel Drive
How to Check Lubricant
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. However, there are two additional systems
that need lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Additional Required
Services on page 6-6.
To get and accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level service.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole, you’ll
need to add some lubricant. Remove the plug and add
enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the
filler plug hole. Use care not to overtighten the plug.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-48
Front Axle
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant.
When to Check and Change Lubricant
When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 1/2 inch (12 mm) below the
filler plug hole.
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on
page 6-13 to determine what kind of lubricant to use.
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
5-49
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
See Replacement Bulbs on page 5-54 for the proper
types of bulbs to use. For any bulb changing procedure
not listed in this section, contact your dealer’s service
department.
Composite Headlamp System
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
To replace the bulbs, do the following:
1. Open and support the hood. See Hood Release on
page 5-11.
2. Access the bulb/sockets from the engine
compartment.
5-50
Sealed Beam Headlamps
To replace the headlamp capsule, do the following:
1. Remove the four retainer screws and the retainer.
2. Pull the headlamp capsule toward you and
unplug the electrical connector.
3. Plug the electrical connector into the new headlamp
capsule.
4. Reverse Steps 1 and 2 to reinstall the headlamp.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull it
straight out of the headlamp housing.
4. Unplug the electrical connector from the old bulb.
5. Plug in the electrical connector to the new bulb.
Use care not to touch the new bulb with your
bare hand or anything damp or oily.
6. Place the connector with the new bulb into the
headlamp housing and turn it clockwise until
it is tight.
5-51
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove
it from the lamp housing.
4. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
5. Insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.
6. Insert the bulb socket into the lamp housing and
turn it clockwise until it is tight.
1. Remove the turn signal/parking lamp/daytime
running lamp (DRL) assembly by pressing on the
release clip on the outboard side of the housing and
pulling the outboard end of the lamp toward you.
2. Pull the inboard side of the lamp out from the small
post in the grille.
7. Place the inboard end of the turn signal/parking
lamp/DRL housing over the small post in the grille.
8. Align the release clip of the lamp assembly with the
square opening in the grille, and push the outboard
side of the lamp assembly in, until the release
clip snaps into place.
5-52
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL)
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the tailgate. See Tailgate on page 2-10.
2. Remove the two rear
lamp assembly screws
near the tailgate
latch and pull out the
lamp assembly.
1. Remove the screws and lift off the lamp assembly.
2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and
remove it from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Insert the new bulb into the socket and press it in
until tight.
5. Insert the bulb socket into the housing and turn
until tight.
6. Reinstall the lamp assembly and tighten the screws.
5-53
A. Stoplamp/Taillamp
B. Turn Signal
C. Back-up Lamp
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it
from the taillamp housing.
4. Pull the old bulb straight out from the socket.
5. Press a new bulb into the socket and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it is tight.
6. Reinstall the rear lamp assembly and tighten the
screws.
7. Close the tailgate.
5-54
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Bulb Number
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
912
Composite Headlamps
Low-Beam
High-Beam
9006
9005
Headlamps, Sealed-Beam
H6054
Park/ Front Turn Signal/Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL)
7157A
Parking Lamps (Inboard)
3157A
Stoplamps, Rear Turn Signals,
Taillamps, and Back-Up Lamps
3057
For any bulb not listed here, contact your dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
1. To remove the old wiper blades, lift the wiper arm
until it locks into a vertical position.
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear and cracking. See “Wiper
Blade Check” under Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle on page 5-98 for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 6-15.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper blade is installed
could damage the windshield. Any damage that
occurs would not be covered by your warranty.
Do not allow the wiper blade arm to touch the
windshield.
A. Blade Assembly
B. Arm Assembly
C. Locking Tab
D. Blade Pivot
E. Hook Slot
F. Arm Hook
2. Press down on the blade assembly pivot locking
tab. Pull down on the blade assembly to release it
from the wiper arm hook.
5-55
3. Remove the insert from the blade assembly. The
insert has two notches at one end that are locked by
bottom claws of the blade assembly. At the notched
end, pull the insert from the blade assembly.
4. To install the new wiper insert, slide the insert (D),
notched end last, into the end with two blade
claws (A). Slide the insert all the way through the
blade claws at the opposite end (B). The plastic
caps (C) will be forced off as the insert is fully
inserted.
5. Be sure that the notches are locked by the bottom
claws. Make sure that all other claws are properly
locked on both sides of the insert slots.
5-56
A. Claw in Notch
B. Correct Installation
C. Incorrect Installation
6. Put the blade assembly pivot in the wiper arm
hook. Pull up until the pivot locking tab locks in
the hook slot.
7. Carefully lower the wiper arm and blade assembly
onto the windshield.
Tires
CAUTION:
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
•
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
•
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
(Continued)
5-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a
typical P-Metric and a compact spare tire sidewall.
P-Metric Tire Example
5-58
(A) Tire Size Code: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size Code” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) UTQG (Uniform Tire Quality Grading): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature
resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire
Quality Grading on page 5-69.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
(D) TIN (Tire Identification Number): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
5-59
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. See “Compact Spare Tire”
under Spare Tire on page 5-93 and If a Tire Goes Flat
on page 5-73.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(C) TIN (Tire Identification Number): The Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire
was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have the
date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
Compact Spare Tire Example
5-60
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter “T” as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the
U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of a
tire size.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of
the illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall
is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
5-62
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-64.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator which can
also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
There are 6.9 kPa’s to one psi.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 pounds
(68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of a asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that faces outward
when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand and or model name molding that is
higher or deeper than the same moldings on the
other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-63
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-67.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards,
a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 5-69.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-52.
5-64
Inflation - Tire Pressure
The tire and loading information label, shows the correct
inflation pressures for your tires when they’re cold.
“Cold” means your vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-52, for the location
of your vehicle’s tire and loading information label.
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Too much flexing
Too much heat
Tire overloading
Bad wear
Bad handling
Bad fuel economy
If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
•
•
•
•
Unusual wear
Bad handling
Rough ride
Needless damage from road hazards
When to Check
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire.
If you have a compact spare tire, it should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they’re underinflated. Check the tire’s
inflation pressure when the tires are cold. cold means
your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a
pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended pressure on the tire and
loading information label, no further adjustment is
necessary. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-67 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-70 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the
wheel wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-74.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important, see Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture.
5-65
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. For the location of the tire
and loading information label see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52. Make certain that all wheel nuts are
properly tightened, see “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications on page 5-108 for the
proper wheel nut torque specification.
{CAUTION:
When rotating your tires, always use one of the correct
rotation patterns shown here.
If your vehicle has a compact spare tire or a spare tire
that does not match your vehicle’s road tires and
wheels, in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
5-66
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off. See “Changing a
Flat Tire” in the Index.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining.
Some commercial truck
tires may not have
treadwear indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-67
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certification/Tire label or the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52, for examples of these labels and where they
can be found on your vehicle.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, traction, ride and
other things during normal service on your vehicle.
If your tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
5-68
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare (if you have one). It was
developed for use on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
5-69
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
5-70
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts or
wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM original
equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for your vehicle.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-74 for more
information.
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been
used or how far it’s been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
5-71
Tire Chains
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P225/75R15, P265/75R15 or
P235/50R17 size tires, do not use tire chains.
They can damage your vehicle because there
is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a
vehicle without the proper amount of clearance
can cause damage to the brakes, suspension
or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by
the tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
CAUTION:
5-72
(Continued)
(Continued)
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
don’t spin your wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P225/75R15, P265/75R15 or P235/50R17, use tire
chains only where legal and only when you must.
Use chains that are the proper size for your tires.
Install them on the tires of the rear axle. Do not use
chains on the tires of the front axle. Tighten them as
tightly as possible with the ends securely fastened.
Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
instructions. If you can hear the chains contacting
your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down until it stops. Driving too fast
or spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusual for a tire to “blowout” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here are a few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-73
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-4 for more information.
{CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of
the tire farthest away from the one being
changed. That would be the tire on the other
side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transmission shift lever
in PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission
to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart while
the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION:
5-74
(Continued)
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
change a tire.
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
The tools you will need are under the passenger’s seat.
For crew cab models, the jack and wheel blocks are
under the driver’s side rear seat. For regular and
extended cab vehicles the jack and wheel blocks are
located under the cover at the center of the vehicle
behind the front seats.
1. The vehicle will
have a cover if it
is an extended or
regular cab.
Crew Cab
Regular and
Extended Cab
5-75
2. Move the seats forward and turn the wing nut on
the cover counterclockwise to remove it. For crew
cab models, reach under the rear seat to access the
jack and wheel blocks. To reinstall the jack and
wheel block assembly in the mounting bracket,
insert the tabs into the jack base by pushing the
blocks up into the assembly. The outer hole in
the jack base aligns with the tab on the bracket.
When reinstalling, make sure the jack is secure,
but do not overtighten the jack in the bracket.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the wheel
wrench to remove the underbody-mounted spare tire.
3. The wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer can
be removed by turning the wing nut
counterclockwise.
Put the wheel blocks at the front and rear of the tire
farthest away from the one being changed. That
would be the tire on the other side, at the opposite
end of the vehicle.
4. There is also a wing nut used to retain the storage
bag and tools located under the front passenger’s
seat. To remove it, turn the wing nut
counterclockwise.
5-76
A. Jack Handle
Extensions
B. Bottle Jack
C. Extension Tool
D. Wheel Wrench
E. Wheel Blocks
1. Assemble the wheel wrench (D) and the jack
handle extensions (A) as shown.
4. When the tire has been
lowered, tilt the retainer
and slide it up the
cable so it can
be pulled up through
the wheel opening.
5. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
2. Insert the hoist end (chiseled end) of the extension
tool through the hole in the rear bumper and into
the funnel-shaped guide. The chiseled end of
the extension is used to lower the spare tire.
3. Turn the wheel wrench (D) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See “Secondary Latch System” later in this
section.
5-77
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end of
the wheel wrench (E) in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
The tools you will be using include the bottle jack (A),
the wheel blocks (B), the extension tool (C), the jack
handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-78
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
Front Location
5-79
Front Location
Rear Location
3. Position the jack (A) under the vehicle as shown.
5-80
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get
under a vehicle when it is supported only by
a jack.
{CAUTION:
Front Location
If the flat tire is on the front of the vehicle, position
the jack to the rear of the front tire in the pocket
off of the frame.
If the flat tire is on the rear, position the jack under
the rear axle and get as close as possible to the
shock absorber.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-81
6. Remove all the wheel
nuts and take off the
flat tire.
Rear Position
4. Make sure the jack head is positioned so that the
rear axle is resting securely between the grooves
that are on the jack head.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the
vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground
so there is enough room for the spare tire to fit
under the wheel well.
5-82
7. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
8. After mounting the
spare, put the wheel
nuts back on with
the rounded end of
the nuts toward
the wheel. Tighten
each wheel nut
by hand. Then use
the wheel wrench to
tighten the nuts
until the wheel is held
against the hub.
5-83
Front Position
Rear Position
9. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-84
10. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown by
turning the wheel
wrench clockwise.
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See “Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See “Capacities and
Specifications” in the index for the wheel nut
torque specification.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the center cap. Place the cap on the
wheel and tap it into place until it seats flush with the
wheel. The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up
the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the
wheel.
5-85
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire,
Jack and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire
carrier. Use the art and text following to help you.
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time or
with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve
stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
5-86
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down.
3. Attach the wheel wrench and extensions together.
2. Tilt the retainer downward and through the wheel
opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated
across the underside of the wheel.
5-87
4. Insert the hoist end through the hole in the rear
bumper and into the funnel-shaped guide.
5. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the tire part
way up. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel
opening and the valve stem is pointed down.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
5-88
A. Push and Pull on Tire
B. Turn Tire
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to turn the tire. If the tire moves,
check to make sure the tire valve stem is pointing
down, then use the wheel wrench to loosen
and then tighten the cable.
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
Return the wheel wrench and jack extensions and the
storage bag to the location under the front passenger’s
seat. Reinstall the jack and wheel blocks, be sure to
install the wheel blocks first. Secure the items in
the vehicle as shown.
Regular and
Extended Cab
Crew Cab
A. Bottle Jack
B. Wheel Blocks
C. Wing Nut
5-89
Secondary Latch System
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch
do the following:
Your vehicle has an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is
designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work,
the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and
Tools” earlier in this section.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end
fitting is visible.
2. If the cable end fitting is not visible proceed to Step 6.
If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by turning
the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two
clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten
the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-90
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of “Removing the Spare Tire and Tools”
earlier in this section.
5. Turn the wrench counterclockwise until
approximately six inches (15 cm) of cable is
exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks
on their shortest ends,
with the backs
facing each other.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle towards the front of the
rear bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack
under the wheel.
9. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it
lifts the tire.
7. Place the bottom edge of the jack on the wheel
blocks, separating them so that the jack is
balanced securely.
10. Continue raising the jack until the tire stops moving
upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary
latch has released and the tire is balancing on
the jack.
5-91
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack. If the
spare tire does not slide off the jack completely,
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of you as you pull the jack out from the
spare.
11. Remove the jack handle and insert the hoist end of
the extension through the hole in the rear bumper.
Turn the wheel counterclockwise one turn or
until the wheel retainer assembly falls out.
12. Reinsert the jack handle into the jack. Lower the
jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise.
Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides
off the jack or is hanging by the cable.
5-92
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to push
against the spare while firmly pulling the jack out
from under the spare tire with the other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert the
hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into the
hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the wheel
wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare the rest
of the way.
Spare Tire
Compact Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a compact spare
tire. Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
14. Tilt the tire retainer at the end of the cable and pull
it through the wheel opening. Pull the tire out from
under the vehicle.
15. If the cable is hanging under the vehicle, turn the
wheel wrench clockwise to raise the cable back up.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” earlier in
this section.
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. For heavy
payloads or towing, and for low traction or
four-wheel-drive conditions, repair or replace the
full-size tire, and reinstall for best performance.
Of course, it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size
tire as soon as you can. Your spare will last longer
and be in good shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire and wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
5-93
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Full-Size Spare Tire
Your vehicle may be equipped with a full-size spare tire,
which, when new, was fully inflated. A spare tire, whether
compact-size or full-size, may lose air over time, so check
its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-64 and Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-52 for information regarding proper tire inflation
and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to
remove, install or store a spare tire, see Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-74.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you should
stop as soon as possible and make sure the spare is
correctly inflated. Have the damaged or flat road
tire repaired or replaced as soon as you can and
installed back onto your vehicle. This way, a spare tire
will be available in case you need it again.
Don’t mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they won’t fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.
5-94
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flames if you strike a
match or get them on a hot part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe their fumes in a closed
space. When you use anything from a container to clean
your vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s
warnings and instructions. And always open your doors
or windows when you are cleaning the inside.
Never use these to clean your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Gasoline
Benzene
Naphtha
Carbon Tetrachloride
Acetone
Paint Thinner
Turpentine
Lacquer Thinner
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage your vehicle, too.
Do not use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
Bleach
Reducing Agents
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet
Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric and
carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM- approved cleaning products from
your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
on page 5-102.
Here are some cleaning tips:
•
•
•
•
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can – before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean the
entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-95
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Cleaning Vinyl
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking sold to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to dry
completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
5-96
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don’t get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Cleaning Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then,
let the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument
Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or a
liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass. See
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger and the integrated radio antenna. When
cleaning the glass on your vehicle, use only a soft
cloth and glass cleaner.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-97
Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep it
clean by washing it often with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-102.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
5-98
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-102.
Your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint
finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Cleaning the Windshield and
Wiper Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
5-99
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels
Sheet Metal Damage
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Cleaning Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-100
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer. Larger areas of
finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s
body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemical Paint Spotting
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl tops,
upholstery and
convertible tops.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
5-102
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines and
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly and easily
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
See your General Motors parts department for these
products. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
Vehicle Identification
Service Parts Identification Label
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts. On this
label, you will find the following:
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-72.
5-103
Windshield Wiper Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
be sure to get it fixed.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the chance of fires
caused by electrical problems.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Power and Heated Seat Circuit
Breakers
There is a circuit breaker located underneath the
driver’s side front seat that controls the power and
heated seat functions.
5-104
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block
Fuse
Usage
1
Brake Switch, Stoplamps
The engine compartment fuse block is located on the
driver’s side of the engine compartment. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location of the engine compartment
fuse block.
2
Auxiliary Power 1
5
Air Conditioning Control Head
8
Wiper/Washer Switch
9
Fog Lamps
To remove the cover, push in on the tab on the end of
the cover and lift. To reinstall the cover, line up the
tab and push down on the cover until the tab clicks
into place.
10
Ignition Transducers
11
Driver’s Side Headlamp
12
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
13
Fuel Pump
14
Wiper
5-105
Fuse
5-106
Usage
Fuse
Usage
15
Front Axle Actuator
28
Rear Turn/Hazard Lights
16
Antilock Brake System (ABS),
ABS module, Four-Wheel Drive,
Gravity Sensor
29
17
Supplemental Inflatable Restraint
System, Sensing and Diagnostic
Module, Air Bag Off Switch
Driver’s Side RearTaillamp,
Passenger Side Air Bag Indicator
Lighting, Instrument Panel Dimming
Power (2WD/4WD switch lighting)
30
Powertrain Control Module (PCM) B
31
OnStar
18
Heated Seat
32
Radio
33
Auxiliary Power 2
19
Cruise Control Switch, Inside
Rearview Mirror, Transfer Case
Control Module, Brake Switch,
Clutch Disable
34
Truck Body Controller
20
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
35
Horn
21
Power Door Locks
36
Transfer Case Control Module
22
Injectors
37
Turn/Hazard/Courtesy/Cargo Lamps/
Mirrors
38
Cluster
23
Ignition, Clutch Starter Switch,
Neutral Safety Back-Up Switch,
Ignition Coils 1-5, Air Conditioning
Relay
39
Rear Parking Lamp 1, Passenger’s
Side Taillamp, License Plate Lamps
24
Transmission Solenoid
25
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
40
Front Park/Turn Lamps, Driver and
Passenger’s Side Power Window
Switches Lighting
26
Back-up Lights
41
Climate Control Fan
27
ERLS, Map Sensor, Can Purge
Solenoid
42
Power Windows
Fuse
Usage
43
Starter Solenoid Relay
44
Antilock Brake System 2 (ABS Pump)
45
Antilock Brake System 1 (ABS Logic)
46
Relays
Usage
54
Driver and Passenger’s
Headlamps Fuse
55
Horn
Power Seat Circuit Breaker/POA Seat
56
Electronic Throttle Control Fuse,
Oxygen Sensor Fuse
69
Fuel Canister Vent Solenoid
57
Wipers (On/Off)
72
Not Used
73
Not Used
58
74
Not Used
Power Window Fuse, Wiper/Washer
Switch Fuse, (Retained Accessory
Power Mode)
75
Not Used
59
Ignition 3, Climate Control,
Climate Control Head Fuse
77
Air Conditioning Compressor
79
Oxygen Sensors
61
Run/Crank, Air Bag System Fuse,
Cruise Control Fuse, Ignition Fuse,
Back-Up Lamps, ABS Fuse, ERLS,
Front Axle, PCM-1, Injectors Fuse
Relays
Usage
62
Starter Relay (PCM Relay)
47
Beam Selection
63
Wiper 2 (High/Low)
50
Air Conditioning Compressor
51
Fuel Pump, Fuel Pump Fuse
52
Fog Lamps
64
Diode — Wiper
53
Front Parking Lamp Fuse, Driver
and Passenger’s Taillamp Fuse,
Rear Parking Lamps
65
Diode — Air Conditioning, Clutch
66
Mega Fuse
67
Not Used
Miscellaneous Usage
5-107
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate conversion capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
Air Conditioning Capacity
Refrigerant R-134a
English
Metric
1.6 lbs
1.73 kg
Cooling System
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
10.4 quarts
10.6 quarts
9.8 L
10.0 L
Differential Fluid
Rear Axle
Front Axle
3.4-3.8 pints
3.2 pints
1.6-1.8 L
1.5 L
5 quarts
6 quarts
4.7 L
5.6 L
Engine Oil with Filter
2.8L
3.5L
Fuel Tank
5-108
19.5 gallons
76 L
Capacities and Specifications (cont’d)
Capacities
Application
English
Transmission (Drain and Refill)
Automatic
Manual
5.0 quarts
2.5 quarts
Wheel Nut Torque
100 lb-ft
Metric
4.7 L
2.4 L
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level or as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Type
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.8L
LK5
8
4L60E Automatic
AR5 Manual
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
3.5L
L52
6
4L60E Automatic
AR5 Manual
0.042 inches (1.07 mm)
5-109
✍ NOTES
5-110
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using Your Maintenance Schedule ....................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-7
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ............................................6-9
At Least Once a Month ...................................6-9
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-10
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-52.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving with Your Four-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle on page 4-15.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-7 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
Some maintenance services can be complex.
So, unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your GM
Goodwrench dealer do these jobs.
6-3
When you go to your GM Goodwrench dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
If you want to get service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-11.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you what
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL light comes on, it means that
service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life system may not
indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed at
least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE OIL light appears, certain services,
checks and inspections are required. Required services
are described in the following for “Maintenance I” and
“Maintenance II.” Generally, it is recommended that your
first service be Maintenance I, your second service be
Maintenance II and that you alternate Maintenance I and
Maintenance II thereafter. However, in some cases,
Maintenance II may be required more often.
6-4
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL light comes on within ten months since vehicle was
purchased or Maintenance II was performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on ten months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Change engine oil and filter. Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil on
page 5-13. An Emission Control Service.
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (g).
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service. See footnote †.
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tires on page 5-57.
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services” in
this section.
Maintenance I
•
Maintenance II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
•
50,000
(83 000)
•
75,000
(125 000)
•
100,000
(166 000)
•
125,000
(207 500)
•
150,000
(240 000)
•
Replace fuel filter.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-18.
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter (severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
and filter (normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
5 years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
6-6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
drum brake linings for wear or cracks. Inspect disc brake
pads for wear and rotors for surface condition. Inspect
other brake parts, including drums, wheel cylinders,
calipers, parking brake, etc. Check parking brake
adjustment.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and
hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Visually check constant velocity joints,
rubber boots and axle seals for leaks.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if
they are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure cap
and cleaning the outside of the radiator and air
conditioning condenser is recommended at least once
a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken air bag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced. (The air
bag system does not need regular maintenance.)
6-7
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, body door and fuel
door hinges, latches and locks (including glove box
and console doors), hood latch assembly, secondary
latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl and any
moving seat hardware. Lubricate hood safety lever
pivot and prop rod pivot and tailgate latch bolt, handle
assembly pivot points and hinges. More frequent
lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal
better and not stick or squeak.
(g) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-8
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for what to use. Inspect hoses.
Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and filler neck.
Pressure test the cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine
Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
At Each Fuel Fill
Tire Inflation Check
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Visually inspect your tires and make sure tires are
inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to check
your spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. Push, pull and then try to rotate or turn
the spare tire. If it moves, tighten it. See Changing a
Flat Tire on page 5-74.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-13 for further
details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
At Least Once a Month
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
6-9
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-29 if
necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
6-10
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The starter should work only
in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
any other position, contact your GM Goodwrench
dealer for service.
On manual transmission vehicles, put the shift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
and try to start the engine. The starter should work
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way
to the floor. If the starter works when the clutch
is not pushed all the way down, contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the ON position,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your GM
Goodwrench dealer for service.
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-29 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
• With a manual transmission, the key should come
out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
6-11
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-12
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your
dealer.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil
Engine oil which meets GM Standard
GM6094M and displays the
American Petroleum Institute
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. To determine the
proper viscosity for your vehicle’s
engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-13.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on
page 5-25.
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
®
Washer Solvent.
Washer Solvent GM Optikleen
Usage
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Power Steering Fluid
Power Steering GM
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184,
System
in Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Manual
Transmission
Manual Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021806,
in Canada 89021807).
Hydraulic
Clutch System
Hydraulic Clutch Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345347,
in Canada 10953517) or equivalent
DOT-3 brake fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front and
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle
Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S.
12378261, in Canada 10953455)
meeting GM Specification 9986115.
Transfer Case
Synchromesh Transmission Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345349,
in Canada 10953465).
Rear Driveline
Center Spline
and Universal
Joints
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Chassis Lubricant
Constant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,
Velocity
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Universal Joint meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor
and Release
Pawl
6-14
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
in Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Hood and Door
Hinges, Body
Door Hinge
Pins, Liftgate Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hinge and
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Linkage,
in Canada 10953474).
Folding Seats
and Fuel Door
Hinge
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points and
Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287,
in Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part Number
24225323
—
15202408
—
88984215
89017342
PF46
PF61
Fuel Filter
25121468
GF580
Spark Plugs
25337472
41-981
Part
Transmission Filter Kit
Automatic
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
2.8 L Engine
3.5 L Engine
Windshield Wiper Blades
GM Part Number
Driver’s Side
15169017
Passenger’s Side
15169018
Wiper Blade Length – Driver’s
22 inches (55 cm)
Wiper Blade Length – Passenger’s
19 inches (48 cm)
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 in this section.
Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users ...............................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ..................................................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders ..................................................7-9
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ..............................................7-10
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ..............................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-11
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7-11
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
• Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of your vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can be
quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already
been reviewed with the sales, service or parts manager,
contact the owner of the dealership or the general
manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by calling
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre in Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top
left of the instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.)
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. You can find your specific vehicle information
all in one place.
The Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual. (United States only)
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members. (United States only)
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com.
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes to write to
GMC, the letter should be addressed to GMC’s
Customer Assistance Center.
United States
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583) (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
7-4
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000
toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your vehicle
(hand controls, wheelchair/
scooter lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as area driver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The offer is available for
a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. For more details, or to determine your
vehicle’s eligibility, see your GM dealer or call the
GM Mobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
All TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Roadside Assistance
prompt)
As the proud owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the city
or travel the open road. GMC’s Roadside Assistance
toll-free number is staffed by courteous and capable
Roadside Assistance Representatives who are available
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles.
7-6
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. (The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.)
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
•
•
•
•
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Telephone number of your location
Location of the vehicle
Courtesy Transportation
Model, year, color, and license plate number
GMC has always exemplified quality and value in its
offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your ownership
experience, we and our participating dealers are
proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number, and delivery
date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you and
your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782,
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
GMC reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required.
This will reduce your inconvenience during warranty
repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
7-7
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle off
for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GMC helps
minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle ride to a destination
up to 10 miles from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement (five days maximum) may be available
for the use of public transportation such as taxi or
bus. In addition, should you arrange transportation
through a friend or relative, reimbursement for
reasonable fuel expenses (five day maximum) may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
you obrtained if your vehicle is kept for a warranty repair.
Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period,
but it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles,
has a number of sophisticated computer systems that
monitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’s
performance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle
computers to monitor emission control components to
optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions for air bag
deployment and, if so equipped, to provide anti-lock
braking and to help the driver control the vehicle
in difficult driving situations. Some information may be
stored during regular operations to facilitate repair
of detected malfunctions; other information is stored only
in a crash or near crash event by computer systems
commonly called event data recorders (EDR).
In a crash or near crash event, computer systems, such
as the Air Bag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM)
in your vehicle may record information about the
condition of the vehicle and how it was operated, such
as engine speed, brake applications, throttle position,
vehicle speed, safety belt usage, air bag readiness,
air bag performance data, and the severity of a collision.
This information has been used to improve vehicle
crash performance and may be used to improve crash
performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the SDM is required.
GM will not access information about a crash event or
share it with others other than
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
•
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or SDM.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
7-10
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Service Publications Ordering
Information
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
Pontiac-GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
7-11
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-12
A
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) .......................... 3-39
AC (Air Conditioning) OFF ............................... 3-39
Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-16
Adding Washer Fluid ....................................... 5-37
Additional Program Information ........................... 7-9
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-6
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-103
Add-On Equipment .......................................... 4-58
Adjusting the Speakers
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-46, 3-49, 3-58
After Off-Road Driving ..................................... 4-29
Air Bag
Off Light ..................................................... 3-26
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-25
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-60
Adding Equipment to Your
Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 1-73
Air Bag Off Switch ....................................... 1-70
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-67
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-72
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-67
What Will You See After an
Air Bag Inflates? ...................................... 1-68
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-66
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-63
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-18
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ......... 7-9
All Overseas Locations ...................................... 7-5
AM ............................................................... 3-68
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-44
Antenna, Fixed Mast ....................................... 3-68
Anti-lock Brake System ..................................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-29
Appearance Care ............................................ 5-94
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-97
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-101
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-95
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-98
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-100
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-100
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-102
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-97
Approaching a Hill .......................................... 4-20
Ashtrays ........................................................ 3-17
Assist Handles ............................................... 2-43
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-42
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-44
Care of Your CD Player ............................... 3-68
Care of Your CDs ........................................ 3-68
Chime Level Adjustment ............................... 3-68
Fixed Mast Antenna ..................................... 3-68
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-47
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-56
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .......................
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .......................
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................
Understanding Radio Reception .....................
Automatic Door Locks .....................................
Automatic Headlamp System ............................
Automatic Transmission ...................................
Fluid ..........................................................
Operation ...................................................
3-43
3-43
3-67
3-68
3-38
3-13
2-18
5-19
2-21
B
Backing Up .................................................... 4-70
BATTERY ...................................................... 3-39
Battery .......................................................... 5-41
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-6
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-16
Battery Warning Light ...................................... 3-27
Bed Rails ...................................................... 2-43
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-36
Before You Go Off-Roading .............................. 4-16
Brake
Parking ...................................................... 2-29
System Warning Light .................................. 3-28
Brake Adjustment ............................................ 5-40
2
Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-38
Brake Pedal Travel ......................................... 5-40
Brake Wear ................................................... 5-40
BRAKES ....................................................... 3-40
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-16
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........ 5-53
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-52
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps ................................................. 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-54
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-68
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-6
Canada ........................................................... 7-4
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-7
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-108
Carbon Monoxide ................... 4-40, 4-60, 2-10, 2-34
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-97
Your CD Player ........................................... 3-68
Your CDs ................................................... 3-68
Cargo Lamps ................................................. 3-15
CD Messages ........................................ 3-55, 3-67
Center Front Passenger Position,
Safety Belts ................................................ 1-24
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) ........... 5-53
Certification/Tire Label ..................................... 4-56
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-72
CHANGE OIL ................................................. 3-40
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-30
Check Engine Light ......................................... 3-30
Checking Brake Fluid ...................................... 5-39
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-27
Checking Engine Oil ........................................ 5-13
Checking the Fluid Level .................................. 5-21
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-73
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-101
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-37
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-34
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) .......................... 1-46
Older Children ............................................. 1-31
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ........................... 1-48, 1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Seat Position ........................................... 1-51
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-53
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ........................... 1-54, 1-58
Top Strap ................................................... 1-42
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................ 1-44
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-40
Chime Level Adjustment .................................. 3-68
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-17
Cleaning
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-95
Outside of Your Vehicle ................................ 5-98
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-101
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-97
Cleaning Aluminum Wheels ............................ 5-100
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................... 5-98
Cleaning Fabric/Carpet .................................... 5-95
Cleaning Glass Surfaces .................................. 5-97
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components ................. 5-97
Cleaning Leather ............................................ 5-96
Cleaning the Mirror ......................................... 2-39
Cleaning the Top of the Instrument Panel ........... 5-97
Cleaning the Windshield and Wiper Blades ......... 5-99
3
Cleaning Tires .............................................. 5-100
Cleaning Vinyl ................................................ 5-96
Climate Control System ................................... 3-18
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-21
Clutch, Hydraulic ............................................. 5-24
Compass Calibration ....................................... 2-37
Compass Operation ......................................... 2-37
Compass Variance .......................................... 2-38
Composite Headlamp System ........................... 5-50
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-14
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-30
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-20
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Crew Cab Models and Extended Cab
Models with Rear Seats ....................... 1-51, 1-58
Cruise Control .................................................. 3-9
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-35
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-42
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-12
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY) Users .............................................. 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
4
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ....... 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-11
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-10
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-11
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-14
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator Light ............. 3-36
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Defogging and Defrosting ................................. 3-20
Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-48
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-49
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-16
Door
Locks .......................................................... 2-7
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Rear Doors ................................................. 2-10
DOORS ......................................................... 3-40
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-16
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-37
DIC Controls and Displays ............................ 3-37
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-29
City ........................................................... 4-34
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-38
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-31
Winter ........................................................ 4-40
Driving Across an Incline .................................. 4-24
Driving Downhill .............................................. 4-23
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice .................... 4-27
Driving in Water .............................................. 4-28
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-71
Driving on Off-Road Hills ................................. 4-20
Driving on Snow or Ice .................................... 4-40
Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-33
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-33
Driving Uphill .................................................. 4-21
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-69
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-103
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-104
Power Windows and Other Power Options ....... 5-104
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-104
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs ................................................... 3-33
ENG (Engine) HOT ......................................... 3-40
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-18
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-30
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-20
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-30
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-34
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-35
Oil ............................................................. 5-13
Overheating ................................................ 5-28
Starting ...................................................... 2-18
Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................... 5-105
Engine Oil Additives ........................................ 5-16
Environmental Concerns .................................. 4-17
5
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................. 7-9
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-16
Express Down Windows .................................. 2-13
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-30
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-12
F
Fan Knob ...................................................... 3-18
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-18
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station ......... 3-50, 3-59
Finding a Station ............................ 3-44, 3-48, 3-57
Finish Care .................................................... 5-98
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-100
Five-Speed .................................................... 2-24
Fixed Mast Antenna ........................................ 3-68
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-7
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-73
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-74
FLUID ........................................................... 3-40
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-19
Manual Transmission .................................... 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
FM ............................................................... 3-68
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-14
6
Following Distance .......................................... 4-70
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-26, 5-48
Front Armrest Storage Area .............................. 2-43
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ...................................................... 5-6
California Fuel .............................................. 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-7
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-36
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
FUEL CAP ..................................................... 3-40
Fuses
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-104
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-104
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-30
Fuel .......................................................... 3-36
Speedometer .............................................. 3-24
Tachometer ................................................. 3-24
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving ................ 4-18
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-42
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................... 7-5
GM Oil Life System™ ...................................... 3-38
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-4
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .................... 3-7
Headlamps .................................................... 5-50
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-52
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-35
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-38
Hitches .......................................................... 4-68
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-4
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-32
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-34
How to Add Fluid .................................... 5-22, 5-23
How to Check ................................ 5-20, 5-22, 5-65
How to Check and Add Fluid ............................ 5-24
How to Check Lubricant .......................... 5-47, 5-49
How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-36
How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ....... 5-18
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-16
Hydraulic Clutch ............................................. 5-24
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-33
I
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine .......... 5-29
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-28
If the Light is Flashing ..................................... 3-32
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-32
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard ......................... 4-42
If You Are Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ....... 4-44
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-61
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-17
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-34
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-64
Instrument Panel
Cluster ....................................................... 3-23
Overview ..................................................... 3-2
Instrument Panel Brightness ............................. 3-15
Interior Lamps ................................................ 3-15
7
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-2
L
Lamps
Exterior ...................................................... 3-12
Interior ....................................................... 3-15
Lamps On Reminder ....................................... 3-13
Language ...................................................... 3-39
Lap Belt ........................................................ 1-24
Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-16
LATCH System
Child Restraints ........................................... 1-46
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System ........................... 1-48, 1-51
Latches, Seatback ............................................ 1-8
Leaving Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-10
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running .......................................... 2-31
Light
Air Bag Off ................................................. 3-26
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-25
8
Light (cont.)
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ................... 3-29
Battery Warning .......................................... 3-27
Brake System Warning ................................. 3-28
Cruise Control ............................................. 3-35
Daytime Running Lamps Indicator .................. 3-36
Highbeam On ............................................. 3-35
Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-30
Oil Pressure ............................................... 3-34
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-24
Security ..................................................... 3-35
Up-Shift ..................................................... 3-28
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-52
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road Driving .......... 4-16
Lockout Protection ............................................ 2-9
Locks
Door ........................................................... 2-7
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-10
Lockout Protection ......................................... 2-9
Power Door .................................................. 2-8
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............... 2-8
Rear Door Security Locks ............................... 2-9
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-14
LOW FUEL .................................................... 3-41
LOW TRAC (Traction) ..................................... 3-41
Lumbar
Manual Controls ............................................ 1-5
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ........................................... 6-9
At Least Once a Month .................................. 6-9
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-10
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-7
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using Your ................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-72
Making Turns ................................................. 4-70
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-30
Manual Lumbar Controls .................................... 1-5
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Manual Transmission ....................................... 2-18
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-24
Manual Windows ............................................ 2-12
Map Lamps .................................................... 2-37
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle ............... 2-6
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands) ....................................... 7-5
Mirror Operation ............................................. 2-37
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-36
Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ............. 2-36
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-40
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-39
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-40
Mode Buttons ................................................. 3-19
Mode Knob .................................................... 3-19
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
9
O
P
Odometer ...................................................... 3-24
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-24
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-12
OIL ............................................................... 3-41
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-13
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-34
OIL LIFE ....................................................... 3-41
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-31
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® Personal Calling ................................. 2-42
OnStar® Services ............................................ 2-41
OnStar® System ............................................. 2-41
OnStar® Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-42
Operating Your All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle
Off Paved Roads ......................................... 4-15
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-4
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-21
Outside
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-40
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-39
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-40
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-12
PARK BRK (Brake) ......................................... 3-41
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-30
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-32
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-29
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-33
Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-71
Parking Your Vehicle ....................................... 2-33
Passing ................................................. 4-13, 4-70
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-16
Payload ......................................................... 4-57
Pickup Conversion to Chassis Cab .................... 4-59
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a CD ......................................... 3-53, 3-62
Playing a Specific Loaded CD .......................... 3-63
Playing the Radio ........................... 3-44, 3-47, 3-56
Power
Accessory Outlets ........................................ 3-16
Door Locks .................................................. 2-8
Electrical System ....................................... 5-104
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-13
10
Power and Heated Seat Circuit Breakers .......... 5-104
Power Steering ............................................... 4-10
Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-30
Programmable Automatic Door Locks .................. 2-8
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-15
R
Radiator Pressure Cap ....................................
Radio Data System (RDS) ....................... 3-50,
Radio Messages ..................................... 3-46,
Radios ..........................................................
AM-FM Radio .............................................
Care of Your CD Player ...............................
Care of Your CDs ........................................
Radio with CD ............................................
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .......................
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) .......................
Theft-Deterrent ............................................
Understanding Reception ..............................
RDS Messages ...................................... 3-52,
5-28
3-59
3-53
3-42
3-44
3-68
3-68
3-47
3-56
3-43
3-43
3-67
3-68
3-61
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-47
Rear Door Security Locks .................................. 2-9
Rear Doors .................................................... 2-10
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-28
Rear Seat Operation ................................. 1-9, 1-10
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-26
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-43
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-37
Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ........................... 2-36
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-36
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-47
REDUCED POWER ........................................ 3-41
Regular Cab Models and
Extended Cab Models
without Rear Seats .............. 3-26, 1-48, 1-54, 1-70
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-78
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-75
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-54
Replacing Brake System Parts .......................... 5-41
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .............................................. 1-74
11
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-11
General Motors ........................................... 7-11
United States Government ............................ 7-10
Restraint System Check
Checking Your Restraint Systems ................... 1-73
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-74
Restraint Systems
Checking .................................................... 1-73
Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-74
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-18
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ......... 1-24
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-45
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16
Running Your Engine While You Are Parked .......... 2-34
S
Safety Belt
Pretensioners ..............................................
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Front Passenger Position ....................
12
1-30
3-24
5-97
1-24
Safety Belts (cont.)
Driver Position ............................................ 1-16
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-16
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........ 1-15
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults ......................... 1-28
Rear Seat Passengers ................................. 1-26
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-24
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-30
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-23
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-11
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-68
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scanning the Terrain ....................................... 4-19
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Sealed Beam Headlamps ................................. 5-51
Seatback Latches ............................................. 1-8
Seats
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1-5
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation .............................. 1-9, 1-10
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Seatback Latches .......................................... 1-8
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-90
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-53
Designed for the LATCH System ........... 1-48, 1-51
Rear Seat Position ...................................... 1-51
Right Front Seat Position ...................... 1-54, 1-58
Security Light ................................................. 3-35
Security While You Travel .................................. 7-6
SERV (Service) 4WD (Four-Wheel Drive) ........... 3-41
SERV VEH (Service Vehicle) ............................ 3-42
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-30
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-11
Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-11
Service Manuals ............................................. 7-11
Setting Preset PTYs ................................ 3-51, 3-60
Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-45, 3-48, 3-57
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ............ 3-43
Radios without Radio Data
Systems (RDS) ........................................ 3-43
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble) .......... 3-45, 3-49, 3-58
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-100
Shift Speeds .................................................. 2-25
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-30
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-32
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................... 1-18
Skidding ........................................................ 4-14
Sliding Rear Windows ..................................... 2-14
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-33
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-93
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems ..................... 5-96
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-108
Speedometer .................................................. 3-24
Stalling on an Incline ....................................... 4-26
Starting Your Engine ............................... 2-18, 2-19
Steering ........................................................ 4-10
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-11
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-10
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-5
Storage Areas
Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-42
Front Armrest Storage Area ........................... 2-43
Glove Box .................................................. 2-42
Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-43
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire, Jack and Tools ....... 5-86
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ...................... 4-44
Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-14
13
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-24
Tailgate ......................................................... 2-10
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-53
Temperature Display Operation ......................... 2-39
Temperature Knob ........................................... 3-18
Testing the Alarm ............................................ 2-15
Theft-Deterrent, Radio ..................................... 3-67
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-14
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-14
Passlock® ................................................... 2-16
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-5
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................... 5-58
Tire Size ....................................................... 5-61
Tire Terminology and Definitions ........................ 5-62
Tires ............................................................. 5-57
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-68
Chains ....................................................... 5-72
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-73
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-64
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-65
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-93
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-69
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-70
14
Tires (cont.)
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-70
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-67
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-20
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-42
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-44
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-32
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-68
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-47
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-60
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-47
Traction
Control System (TCS) .................................... 4-9
TRACTION FAULT .......................................... 3-42
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-59
Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-69
Transfer Case ................................................ 5-48
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-19
Fluid, Manual .............................................. 5-22
Up-Shift Light .............................................. 3-28
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-21
Transmission Operation, Manual ........................ 2-24
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case Unit
Repair Manual ............................................ 7-11
Transportation Options ...................................... 7-8
Traveling to Remote Areas ............................... 4-17
Trip Information .............................................. 3-37
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-24
Truck-Camper Loading Information .................... 4-59
Turn and Lane Change Signals .......................... 3-6
TURN SIGNAL ............................................... 3-42
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-5
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer .................. 4-70
Two-Tiered Loading ......................................... 4-58
U
Understanding Radio Reception ........................ 3-68
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-69
United States ................................................... 7-4
Up-Shift Light ......................................... 2-25, 3-28
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-71
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-95
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-65
Using the Recovery Hooks ............................... 4-45
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-52
Vehicle (cont.)
Parking Your ............................................... 2-33
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Data Collection and Event Data
Recorders .................................................... 7-9
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-103
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-103
Vehicle Storage .............................................. 5-42
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-21
Visors ........................................................... 2-14
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-22
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-39
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-4
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-4
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-98
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-61
Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-67
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches .......................................... 4-68
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-14
15
What to Add ..................................................
What to Do with Used Oil ................................
What to Use .................. 5-26, 5-36, 5-37, 5-47,
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance ..........................
Replacement ...............................................
When to Add Engine Oil ..................................
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System) ...................................
When to Check ...................................... 5-22,
When to Check and Change ............................
When to Check and Change Lubricant ....... 5-47,
When to Check and What to Use .....................
When to Check Power Steering Fluid ................
When to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ........
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill .........................................
Where to Put the Restraint ...............................
16
5-39
5-17
5-49
5-70
5-70
5-14
5-16
5-65
5-19
5-49
5-24
5-36
5-18
4-72
1-40
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-12
Window Lockout ............................................. 2-13
Windows ....................................................... 2-12
Manual ...................................................... 2-12
Power ........................................................ 2-13
Sliding Rear ................................................ 2-14
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-8
Fluid .......................................................... 5-37
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement ...................................... 5-55
Fuses ...................................................... 5-104
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-8
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-40
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement